Nissan - FRONTIER - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2014

® 2014 F R O NTI E R OWNER’S MANUAL For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY! A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law. Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them. ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in the rear seat. In addition to factory installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed by NISSAN or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, ● NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions. ● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you. ● ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for important safety information. WHEN READING THE MANUAL For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive mark is placed at the beginmodels, a ning of the applicable sections/items. As with other vehicles with features for off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read “Driving safety precautions” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off-road use. As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read “On-pavement and offroad driving precautions”, and “Avoiding collision and rollover”, and “Driving safety precautions”, in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties. This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/ nowners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s Manual for contact information. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways: WARNING WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely. CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully. APD1005 Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.” CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration. BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon and Clarion. SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires subscription, sold separately. Not available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam. For more information, visit www.siriusxm.com. © 2013 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc. NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number: For U.S. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: – Your name, address, and telephone number – Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side) – Date of purchase – Current odometer reading – Your NISSAN dealer’s name – Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at: For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: [email protected] For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: [email protected] If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers) We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents 0 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4 Starting and driving 5 In case of emergency 6 Appearance and care 7 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8 Technical and consumer information 9 Index 10 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10 AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 1. 2. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-15) Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-65) 3. Front seat belts (P. 1-15) 4. Head restraints/headrests (P.1-6 ) 5. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-72) 6. Seats (P. 1-2) 7. Occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) (P. 1-72) 8. Seat belt with pretensioners (P. 1-78) 9. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-65) 10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P. 1-27) 11. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-30) See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. WII0135 0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT 1. 2. Engine hood (P. 0-8) Windshield wiper and washer switch (P. 2-26) 3. Windshield (P. 8-22) 4. Windows (P. 2-47) 5. Door locks, keyfob (if so equipped), keys (P. 3-3, 3-6, 3-2) 6. Mirrors (P. 3-15) 7. Tire pressure (P. 8-33) 8. Flat tire (P. 6-3) 9. Tire chains (P. 8-40) 10. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-28); Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29) 11. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-32) See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII0052 Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Rear sliding window (if so equipped) (P.2-50) Vehicle loading (P. 9-13) Truck box, tailgate (P. 3-17) Rear view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-10) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29) Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation (P. 3-11, P. 9-4) See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII2111 0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 1. 2. 3. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Sun visors (P. 3-14) Rearview mirror (if so equipped) (P. 3-15) 4. Vents (P. 4-15) 5. Glove box (P. 2-42) 6. Shift lever (automatic transmission, if so equipped) (P. 5-13) 7. Cup holders (P. 2-44) 8. Front seats (P. 1-2) 9. Console box (P. 2-41) 10. Rear seats (P. 1-12) 11. Flat tire/Jacking equipment storage (P. 6-3) See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. WII0054 Illustrated table of contents 0-5 INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. LIC2471 0-6 Illustrated table of contents Vents (P. 4-15) Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-28) Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so equipped)/Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System (if so equipped) (P. 4-63, P.4-59) Driver supplemental air bag/horn (P. 1-65, P. 2-32) Meters, gauges and warning/indicator lights (P. 2-3, 2-14) Cruise control main/set switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-21) Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-26) Storage (P. 2-38) Audio system controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-35) Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-65) Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-42) Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-74) Power outlet (P. 2-37) Power outlet (P. 2-37) 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped) (P.2-35) Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-33) Rear sonar switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-34) Shift lever (P. 5-13, 5-18) 4WD shift switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-26) Climate controls (P. 4-16, P.4-23) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-3) Ignition switch (P. 5-10) Tilt steering wheel control if so equipped) (P. 3-13) Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-32) Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-36)/Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-34) Outside mirror controls (if so equipped) (P. 3-17) Illustrated table of contents 0-7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS QR25DE engine 1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-15) 2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-24) 3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-24) 4. Air cleaner (P. 8-20) 5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10) 6. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10) 7. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14) 8. Drive belt location (P.8-18) 9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8) 10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 11. Battery (P. 8-16) 12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8) See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. WDI0643 0-8 Illustrated table of contents VQ40DE engine 1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-15) 2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-24) 3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-24) 4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10) 5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10) 6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14) 7. Air cleaner (P. 8-20) 8. Drive belt location (P.8-18) 9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8) 10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) 11. Battery (P. 8-16) 12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8) *Engine cover removed for clarity. See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details. LII0167 Illustrated table of contents 0-9 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning light or Name Page Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light 2-15 Automatic transmission check warning light 2-15 Automatic transmission oil temperature warning light (if so equipped) 2-15 Automatic transmission park warning light ( model) 2-15 Brake warning light 2-16 or 0-10 Illustrated table of contents Warning light Name Page Charge warning light 2-16 Door open warning light 2-16 Engine oil pressure warning light 2-17 4WD warning light ( model) 2-17 Low fuel warning light 2-17 Low tire pressure warning light 2-17 Low windshieldwasher fluid warning light (if so equipped) 2-19 Seat belt warning light and chime 2-19 Warning light Name Supplemental air bag warning light Indicator light Page 2-19 Name Page Automatic transmission position indicator light (if so equipped) 2-20 Cruise main switch indicator light (if so equipped) 2-20 Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) 2-20 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system on indicator light (if so equipped) 2-20 Indicator light Name Page Indicator light Name Page 4WD shift indicator light ( model) 2-20 Slip indicator light for models with ABLS 2-22 Front passenger air bag status light 2-20 Slip indicator light for models with VDC 2-22 High beam indicator light (blue) 2-21 2-22 Hill descent control system on indicator light (if so equipped) 2-34 Transfer 4LO position indicator light ( model) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights 2-23 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 2-21 2-23 Overdrive off indicator light (A/T models only) 2-22 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light Security indicator light (if so equipped) 2-22 Illustrated table of contents 0-11 1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front power seat adjustment (if so equipped for Crew cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Jump seat (King cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Armrest (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Head restraints/Headrests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH (Crew cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH — Jump seat (King cab models only). . . . . . 1-33 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts (Crew cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts — jump seat (King cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH (Crew cab model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH — jump seat (King cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts — front passenger and rear bench seat (Crew cab models only) . . . . . . . . . 1-50 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts — front passenger and jump seats (King cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 Installing top tether strap (Front passenger seat – King cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Installing top tether strap (Jump seat – King cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59 Installing top tether strap (Rear bench seat – Crew cab models only). . . . . . . 1-59 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60 Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80 SEATS ● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle. ● The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased. ARS1152 WARNING ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. ● For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section. ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. ● Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. 1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage. FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped) WRS0175 WRS0176 Forward and backward Reclining Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position. To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. WRS0131 Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s seat) Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to the desired position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 WRS0389 WRS0163 Lumbar support (if so equipped for driver’s seat) FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for Crew cab models) The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver. Move the lever forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area. Operating tips ● The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. ● Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. 1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied. WRS0164 Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s seat) Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion. LRS0556 JUMP SEAT (King cab) WARNING ● Do not use a child restraint in the driver’s side jump seat. This seating position is not suitable for child restraint installation. A child restraint can be installed in the passenger’s side jump seat when the seat extension is unfolded from the seat base. ● When folding the jump seat, be careful not to squeeze your finger between the seat cushion and the body side. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS WARNING LRS2089 ARMREST (if so equipped) To use the center armrest on the 2nd row bench seat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat and fold it down to the resting position. Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. LRS2361 Crew Cab The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints/headrests. 䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint. 䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest. + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable). ● Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable. 1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system – If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position. ● If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position. LRS2362 King Cab ● Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk to lock them in a desired adjustment position. ● The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame. ● Proper Adjustment: LRS2300 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 2. Multiple notches 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks – For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. LRS2299 Non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest components 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 2. Single Notch 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks LRS2302 Remove Use the following procedure to remove the head restraints/headrests. 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position. 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle. 1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2303 Install 1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the notch (notches) 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock 䊊 2 . knob 䊊 WRS0134 Adjust For adjustable head restraint/headrest Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position. LRS2351 For non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and the head restraint/headrest down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 LRS2305 LRS2306 SPA1025 Raise Lower Front-seat Active Head Restraints To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position. Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original position. 1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described in this section. FLEXIBLE SEATING WARNING ● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. ● If the head restraints/headrests are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. ● When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. ● Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. LRS0608 Folding the front passenger’s seatback flat (if so equipped) ● Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats. To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for extra storage length when transporting long items: ● Head restraints/headrests should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason. 1 䊊 Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Lift up on the recline lever, located on the outside edge of the seat, and fold the seatback forward as far as it will go. Then lift up on the latch located on the upper corner of the seatback to release the back of the seat. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 WARNING ● If you fold the front passenger’s seatback flat forward to carry longer objects, be sure this cargo is properly secured and not near an air bag. In a crash, an inflating air bag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Secure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inflate. See “Precautions on supplemental restraint system” later in this section. LRS0609 2 䊊 Once the seatback is released, it will enable you to fold the front passenger seatback flat over the seat cushion. ● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the front passenger’s seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop. 3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a seating position, lift up on the seatback and push it up to an upright position. Then pull up on the recline lever and lean the seatback to a proper seating position. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. 1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0398 Folding the rear bench seat To fold the rear bench seat up: 1 䊊 Lift up on the lever, located on the side of the seat, while lifting the front of the seat cushion up. WARNING ● When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo, properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. LRS0566 2 䊊 Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward the back of the vehicle until it locks in place. LRS0567 3 䊊 Repeat this process to raise and secure the seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle for maximum storage capacity. To return the rear bench seat to a seating position, reverse the process. Make sure to properly push the seat cushion down into place. ● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Never ride in the rear seat unless the seat bottom cushions are in place and latched. ● When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 WARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop. WRS0840 Folding the rear bench seat down The rear bench seatback can be tilted forward to access the child restraint anchor point locations or the jacking equipment. 1 To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap up 䊊 and tilt the seatback. The child restraint anchor 2 can be accessed behind the rear points 䊊 bench seatback. The jacking equipment can be accessed from behind the passenger’s side seatback. 1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SEAT BELTS SSS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 SSS0134 WARNING ● Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint. 1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0016 WARNING ● The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. ● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. ● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. ● Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. ● Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. SSS0014 WARNING ● Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. ● Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident. ● If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. ● No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. ● Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. ● Removal and installation of pretensioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer. ● All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. ● All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations. THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR WARNING ● Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. ● For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. ● Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt. 1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0175 Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts (Front seats all models and rear seats Crew cab models) 1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this section. The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. LRS0594 2 䊊 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. ● The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. ● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. LRS0595 3 䊊 4 䊊 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation: ● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child restraints” later in this section for more information. The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. Fastening the seat belts (Jump seats King cab models) LRS0556 1. Open the jump seat. See “Seats” earlier in this section. LRS0569 2 䊊 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. ● The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. ● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. 1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child restraints” later in this section for more information. LRS0570 3 䊊 4 䊊 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. The jump seat position’s three-point seat belts have two modes of operation: ● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. WRS0139 Unfastening the seat belts 1 䊊 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts. Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: ● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. ● When the vehicle slows down rapidly. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: WARNING ● After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. ● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement. If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt operation, see a NISSAN dealer. ● The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. SEAT BELT EXTENDERS LRS0242 Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section. To 1 and adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊 move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired 2 , so the belt passes over the center of position 䊊 the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. 1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required. CHILD SAFETY WARNING ● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts. ● Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. ● Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop. SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE ● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. ● Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced. WARNING Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt. Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child. ● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 There are three basic types of child restraint systems: ● Rear-facing child restraint ● Forward-facing child restraint ● Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint. WARNING Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. See “Child restraints” section for more information. NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat if available (Crew Cab models). Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) for the front passenger. See “Supplemental restraint system” later in this section. INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See “Child restraints” later in this section. 1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rearfacing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer. CHILD RESTRAINTS Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck and the lap belt can be positioned properly across the lower hips or upper thighs, use the seat belt without the booster seat. WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. ARS1098 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS WRS0256 WARNING ● Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: – Do not install rear-facing child restraints in the driver’s side rear seating position (King cab models only). Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 – For forward-facing child seats and boosters, DO NOT install if the child restraint base extends past the forward edge of the seat cushion. – The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use. – Infants and children should never be held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision. – Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger. – NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, see “Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” later in this section. – Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. ● When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle. – Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle. A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint. – Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted. This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system” later in this section. – Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses. – A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat (King cab models only). – Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint. – Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle. 1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CAUTION If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. ● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. ● If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle. LRS0429 LATCH system lower anchor locations (Crew cab models) LRS2016 LATCH system lower anchor locations (King cab models) LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH lower anchors. LATCH lower anchor WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision: – Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. LRS0748 – Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration. LATCH lower anchor location – Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly. The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback (Crew cab models only) to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors. – Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed. 1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LATCH lower anchor location LRS0571 LATCH label locations (Crew cab models only) LRS0661 LATCH webbing-mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LRS0662 LATCH rigid-mounted attachment When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint. LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 Top tether anchor WARNING ● Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. ● Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. LRS0572 Front passenger seat (King cab models only) 1. Top tether strap 2. Anchor point Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located in the following locations: ● On the back of the front passenger seat (King cab only) as shown. 1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0393 Rear bench seat (Crew cab models only) ● Under the rear window behind the rear bench seat (Crew cab only) as shown. REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH (Crew cab models only) Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. LRS2101 Jump seats (King cab models - passenger side shown) ● On the floor between the jump seat belt buckles in the center of the vehicle (King cab only) as shown. WRS0801 Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors. 3 is located on the floor beThe anchor point 䊊 tween the jump seat belt buckles in the center of 2 is located the vehicle. The routing bracket 䊊 1 under the rear window behind the cover plate 䊊 above the jump seat. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 WRS0802 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 LRS0673 Rear-facing – step 3 3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments. 1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0674 Rear-facing – step 4 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 4. – Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump seat without unfolding the seat extender. LRS2357 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH — JUMP SEAT (King cab models only) WARNING ● If a child restraint system is not installed properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. – Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the driver’s side jump seat. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 – The front seat cannot be used when a rear-facing child restraint is installed on the jump seat. Attempting to do so could cause serious injury in a sudden stop or collision. LRS2356 WARNING ● To install a rear-facing child restraint on the passenger’s side jump seat, it will be necessary to move the front passenger’s seat fully forward and place the front seatback upright or tilt it forward. Failure to do so may cause the child restraint to not be installed properly and cause serious injury or death in a sudden stop or collision. 1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0559 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a child restraint on the jump seat. 1. To access the jump seat extension (passen1 on the jump seat, pull up ger’s side only) 䊊 2 on the extension to unfold it to the open 䊊 position. Then unfold the two support legs 3 and lower the jump seat to the full open 䊊 4 seating position. 䊊 LRS2359 LRS0537 2 䊊 Rear-facing — step 2 Move the front passenger’s seat into the FULL FORWARD position. Then move the front seatback to the upright or tilted forward position. Position the child restraint on the jump seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions. WRS0801 Rear-facing web-mounted – step 4 4. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors. 3. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 WRS0802 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 4 LRS0673 Rear-facing – step 5 5. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments. 1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0674 Rear-facing – step 6 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6. WARNING The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. WRS0256 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS (Crew cab models only) Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 WRS0256 Rear-facing – step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats: WRS0761 Rear-facing – step 2 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing. 1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0669 Rear-facing – step 3 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. LRS0670 Rear-facing – step 4 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. WRS0762 Rear-facing – step 5 5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. WRS0763 Rear-facing – step 6 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. WARNING ● The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. LRS0597 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS — JUMP SEAT (King cab models only) ● A child restraint system will not be installed properly and the child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. – Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the driver’s side jump seat. – Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump seat without unfolding the seat extender. 1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system – The front seat cannot be used when a rear-facing child restraint is installed on the jump seat. Attempting to do so could cause serious injury in a sudden stop or collision. LRS0549 WARNING ● To install a rear-facing child restraint on the passenger’s side jump seat, it will be necessary to move the front passenger’s seat fully forward and place the front seatback upright or tilt it forward. Failure to do so may cause the child restraint to not be installed properly and cause serious injury or death in a sudden stop or collision. LRS0559 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a child restraint on the passenger’s side jump seat. 1 on the 1. To access the jump seat extension 䊊 2 on passenger’s side jump seat, pull up 䊊 the extension to unfold it to the open posi3 tion. Then unfold the two support legs 䊊 4 and lower the jump seat to the full open 䊊 seating position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 LRS0544 LRS0537 2 䊊 Rear-facing — step 2 Move the front passenger’s seat into the FULL FORWARD position. Then move the front seatback to the upright or tilted forward position. Position the child restraint on the jump seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0545 3 䊊 Rear-facing — step 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing. LRS0546 4 䊊 Rear-facing — step 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. LRS0547 5 䊊 Rear-facing — step 5 Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. WRS0762 Rear-facing – step 6 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH (Crew cab model only) WRS0918 Rear-facing — step 7 7. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0799 Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. 3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraints/headrests” in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment information. WRS0800 Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. LRS0671 Forward-facing – step 4 4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments. 5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6. WRS0697 Forward-facing – step 6 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2360 FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH — JUMP SEAT (King cab models only) WARNING ● If a child restraint system is not installed properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. – Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump seat without unfolding the seat extender. – For forward-facing child seats and boosters, DO NOT install if the child restraint base extends past the forward edge of the driver’s side seat cushion. WRS0699 LRS0559 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a child restraint on the jump seat. 1. To access the jump seat extension (passen1 on the jump seat, pull up ger’s side only) 䊊 2 on the extension to unfold it to the open 䊊 position. Then unfold the two support legs 3 and lower the jump seat to the full open 䊊 4 seating position. 䊊 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 WRS0799 LRS0537 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Forward-facing web-mounted – step 3 3. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. 1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0800 Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3 4. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraints/headrests” in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment information. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. LRS0671 Forward-facing – step 5 5. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments. 6. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. WRS0697 Forward-facing – step 7 7. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 8. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 7. the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT PASSENGER AND REAR BENCH SEAT (Crew cab models only) The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. WARNING The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. WRS0699 Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats (Crew cab models only) or in the front passenger seat: 1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in 1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraints/headrests” in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. WRS0680 Forward-facing – step 3 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. LRS0667 Forward-facing – step 4 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. LRS0668 Forward-facing – step 5 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 8. WRS0681 Forward-facing – step 6 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. WRS0698 Forward-facing – step 8 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING ● The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. WRS0475 Forward-facing – step 10 10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag should illuminate. If this status light light is not illuminated, see ⬙Front passenger air bag and status light⬙ in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. LRS0598 FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT PASSENGER AND JUMP SEATS (King cab models only) ● If a child restraint system is not installed properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. – Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump seat without unfolding the seat extender. – For forward-facing child seats and boosters, DO NOT install if the child restraint system base extends past the forward edge of the driver’s side seat cushion. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 WRS0699 Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1 LRS0559 LRS0537 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the passenger’s side jump seat (King cab models only) or in the front passenger seat: 1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. 1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2. To access the jump seat extension (passen1 on the jump seat, pull up ger’s side only) 䊊 2 on the extension to unfold it to the open 䊊 position. Then unfold the two support legs 3 and lower the jump seat to the full open 䊊 4 seating position. 䊊 If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. WRS0919 Forward-facing — step 3 3. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraints/headrests” in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55 WRS0680 Forward-facing — step 4 4. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap to seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. LRS0667 Forward-facing — step 5 5. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. 1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0668 Forward-facing — step 6 6. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. 10. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 9. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. WRS0681 Forward-facing – step 7 7. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt. 8. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. WRS0698 Forward-facing — step 9 9. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the seat near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57 WARNING Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. LRS0572 Front passenger seat (King cab models only) INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (Front passenger seat – King cab models only) Before securing the child restraint with the seat belt, 1. If necessary, raise or remove the head restraint/headrest to position the top tether 1 over the top of the seatback. If the strap 䊊 head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraint/headrest ” in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. 1 between the 2. Route the top tether strap 䊊 head restraint/headrest and the top of the seatback. 1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor 2 on the seatback. point 䊊 4. Refer back to child restraint installation steps before tightening the tether strap. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, consult your NISSAN dealer for details. ● Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt. LRS0561 Jump seat (King cab models only) INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (Jump seat – King cab models only) WARNING ● Do not secure the top tether strap to the routing bracket. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. 1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top tether strap routing bracket for the jump seat. 1 through the 2. Route the top tether strap 䊊 2 . routing bracket 䊊 3. Secure the top tether strap to the tether 3 located between the seat anchor point 䊊 belt buckles in the center of the vehicle. 4. Refer back to child restraint installation steps before tightening the tether strap. LRS0392 Anchor point access INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (Rear bench seat – Crew cab models only) 2 behind the rear To access the anchor points 䊊 bench seat, tilt the rear seatback forward by 1 behind the seatlifting up on the pull strap 䊊 back. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, consult your NISSAN dealer for details. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59 2. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback and under the head restraint/headrest. – Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child’s arm. 2 to the tether 3. Secure the tether strap 䊊 3 on the seat directly behind anchor point 䊊 the child restraint. – A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt. 4. Return the seatback to the locked position. 5. Refer back to child restraint installation steps before tightening the tether strap. LRS0576 Rear bench seat (Crew cab models only) Before securing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seating positions only [crew cab models only] ) or the seat belt, as applicable, follow these steps. 1. If necessary, raise or remove the head restraint/headrest to position the top tether 1 over the top of the seatback. If the strap 䊊 head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraint/headrest” in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, consult your NISSAN dealer for details. BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats WARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases: – Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach. 1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464 Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind: ● Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. ● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61 ● Make sure the child’s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a 1 is chosen, the low back booster seat 䊊 vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child’s ears, a 2 should be used. high back booster seat 䊊 Booster seat installation on front passenger seat and rear seat (Crew cab models only) ● If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures. Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats” sections before installing a child restraint. CAUTION Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat: All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat. 1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0699 1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position. 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. LRS0454 Front passenger position 3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. See “Head restraints/headrests” in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt with retractor” earlier in this section. WRS0475 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag may or may not illuminate, status light depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63 Booster seat installation — jump seats (King cab models only) WARNING ● If a child restraint system is not installed properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision. – For boosters, DO NOT install if the child restraint system base extends past the forward edge of the seat cushion. – Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump seat without unfolding the seat extender. CAUTION Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. LRS0559 1. To access the jump seat extension (passen1 on the jump seat, pull up ger’s side only) 䊊 2 on the extension to unfold it to the open 䊊 position. Then unfold the two support legs 3 and lower the jump seat to the full open 䊊 4 seating position. 䊊 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats” sections before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the jump seats: 1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0537 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information. PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the following systems: 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. LRS0539 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions. 3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. See “head restraint/headrest” in this section for head 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt with retractor” earlier in this section. ● Driver and passenger supplemental frontimpact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) ● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag ● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag ● Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front-impact air bag system: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65 Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time. These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage. The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. WRS0031 WARNING ● The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. ● The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. 1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ● The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. ● The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. ● The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. ARS1133 ● Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67 ARS1041 ARS1042 ● Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. ● Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible. WARNING WARNING 1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1043 ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256 WARNING ● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for details. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69 WRS0431 Do not lean against the door. LRS0396 Do not lean against doors or windows. WARNING Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags: ● The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. 1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0162 Do not lean against doors or windows. WARNING ● The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations. LRS0421 SSS0159 WARNING ● When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. ● Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71 1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators 3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) 4. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules 5. Crash zone sensor 6. Occupant classification system control unit 7. Occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) 8. Satellite sensors 9. Seat belt buckle switches 10. Seat belt with pretensioner 11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag module NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats) LRS0565 1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage inflators. It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it additionally monitors the weight of an occupant or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section for further details. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system. If you have any questions about your air bag system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual. When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation. The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73 Status light is The front passenger air bag status light located near the climate controls. After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙ position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows: ● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The light is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. WRS0475 Front passenger air bag and status light WARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. ● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this light illuminates to indisection: The cate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. ● Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meet the conditions outlined in this seclight is OFF to indicate that tion: The the front passenger air bag is operational. Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a 1-74 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements. One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. It works together with seat belt sensors described later. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor operation can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors. The front passenger seat belt sensors are designed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag System determines whether the front passenger air bag should be automatically turned OFF as required by the regulations. Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode, this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for proper use and installation. If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object’s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly. Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-75 If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning , located in the meter and gauges area light of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. ● Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system. Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions ● Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. WARNING ● Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate. ● Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. ● No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. ● Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor). 1-76 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ● No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. ● Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. ● A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system. *The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions. Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe off roading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation. WRS0422 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are designed to inflate on the side When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. The curtain air bags will remain inflated for a short time. The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-77 WARNING ● Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates. ● Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. ● No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. ● Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain air bag systems. ● Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag. ● Work around and on the side air bag and curtain air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag systems. * The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. 1-78 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seat belts with pretensioners (Front seats) WARNING ● The pretensioners cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit. ● If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but a pretensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer. ● No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners. Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury. ● Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system. ● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants. is The supplemental air bag warning light used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. (See ⬙SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT⬙ in this section for more details.) If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual. The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts. When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. WRS0885 1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor. SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-79 If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing: ● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. ● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. ● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. LRS0100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioners and all related wiring. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer. WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. 1-80 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle. WARNING ● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioners must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pretensioner cannot be repaired. ● If you need to dispose of a supplemental air bag or pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. ● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-81 2 Instruments and controls Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-8 Voltmeter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Compass and outside temperature display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-14 Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-30 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Cargo lamp switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-37 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Under-seat storage bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Seat pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Manual windows (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . 2-54 Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Operating the HomeLink® universal transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button. . . . . . 2-57 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. LIC2471 2-2 Instruments and controls Vents (P. 4-15) Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-28) Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so equipped)/Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System (if so equipped) (P. 4-63, P.4-59) Driver supplemental air bag/horn (P. 1-65, P. 2-32) Meters, gauges and warning/indicator lights (P. 2-3, 2-14) Cruise control main/set switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-21) Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-26) Storage (P. 2-38) Audio system controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-35) Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-65) Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-42) Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-74) Power outlet (P. 2-37) Power outlet (P. 2-37) METERS AND GAUGES 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped) (P.2-35) Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-33) Rear sonar switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-37) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-34) Shift lever (P. 5-13, 5-18) 4WD shift switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-26) Climate controls (P. 4-16, P.4-23) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-3) Ignition switch (P. 5-10) Tilt steering wheel control (if so equipped) (P. 3-13) Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-32) Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-36)/Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-34) Outside mirror controls (if so equipped) (P. 3-17) LIC2028 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Warning/indicator lights Tachometer Speedometer Fuel gauge Voltmeter (if so equipped) 6. 7. 8. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip computer (if so equipped) Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) Engine coolant temperature gauge Instruments and controls 2-3 The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. LIC0780 LIC2029 1. 2. 3. Speedometer Odometer/Twin trip odometer Change/Loose fuel cap warning message reset/Check tire pressure warning message reset button SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. 2-4 Instruments and controls With twin trip odometer Changing the display: For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer, pressing the change button changes the display as follows: Trip → Trip → Trip LIC0781 With trip computer For vehicles equipped with trip computer, pressing the change button changes the display as follows: → Trip → Distance to Empty → Trip Average speed → Average fuel consumption → Journey time → Trip For additional information, refer to “Trip computer” later in this section. Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the change button for more than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero. LRS2004 Loose fuel cap warning message A for more than 1 second Press the reset button 䊊 to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message after the fuel cap has been tightened. For additional information see “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section. LIC2017 Check tire pressure warning message The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. Check and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off. The low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as Instruments and controls 2-5 long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. For more information see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” and “Wheels and tires” section in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this Owner’s Manual. LIC0738 TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the engine 1 . into the red zone 䊊 CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage. 2-6 Instruments and controls LIC0739 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the 1 when the gauge needle points normal range 䊊 within the zone shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions. indicates that the fuel-filler door is The located on the driver’s side of the vehicle. CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section for immediate action required. CAUTION ● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. light After a few driving trips. the should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. LIC0740 ● For additional information, see “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” later in this section. FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition key is turned to OFF. The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers E (Empty). Instruments and controls 2-7 CAUTION ● This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.) ● If the gauge needle does not move with the proper amount of engine oil, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine. LIC0741 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if so equipped) The gauge indicates the engine lubrication system oil pressure while the engine is running. The needle should be in the middle of the gauge when the engine is running. 2-8 Instruments and controls WIC1299 VOLTMETER (if so equipped) When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage. While cranking the engine, the volts drop below the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal 1 while the engine is range (11 - 15 volts) 䊊 running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) The display of the trip computer is situated in the speedometer display. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the display scrolls all the modes of the trip computer and then shows the mode chosen before the ignition switch was placed in the OFF position. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the trip computer change button. The following modes can be selected: Distance to empty (dte—mile or km) The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The dte mode includes a low range warning feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is automatically selected and the digits blink in order to draw the driver’s attention. Press the change button if you wish to return to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred. The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the vehicle is refueled. When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte display will change to (----). NOTE: ● If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may continue to be displayed. ● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display. Average speed (MPH or km/h) The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the change button for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows (----). Trip computer reset Pushing the change button for more than 3 seconds will reset all modes except Trip A and distance to empty (dte). Average fuel consumption (Mpg or l/100km) The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the change button for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display shows (----). Journey time The journey time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pressing the change button for more than approximately 1 second. Instruments and controls 2-9 COMPASS AND OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if so equipped) This unit has the following functions: ● Measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates heading direction of vehicle ● Indicates outside air temperature (if so equipped) With the ignition switch in the ON position, press or button as described in the the charts below to activate various features of the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror. Type A Push and hold the button for about: 1 second 8 seconds 11 seconds 13 seconds Feature: (Push button again for about 1 second to change settings) Compass display toggles on/off Automatic anti-glare/indicator light toggles on/off Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode Type B Push and hold the button for about: 1 second 8 seconds 10 seconds Feature: (Push button again for about 1 second to change settings) Compass display toggles on/off Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings Compass enters calibration mode For information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section. WIC0904 Type A OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY Push the or button for about 1 second when the ignition key is in the ON position to toggle the outside temperature and compass 1 on or off. direction display 䊊 ● To change from °F to °C, push and hold button for about 5 seconds or the button for about 3 seconds until the the display begins to flash. Press the button again to toggle between °C and °F. 2-10 Instruments and controls ● The outside temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind direction and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards. COMPASS DISPLAY LIC0583 Type B ● When the outside temperature is between 140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the display will read 140°F (60°C). When the temperature is above 194°F (90°C), the display will read “SC”. ● When the outside temperature is between than -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F (-51°C), the display will read -40°F (-40°C). When the temperature is below -60°F (-51°C), the display will read “OC”. Push the or button for about 1 second when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the outside temperature and 1 on or off. The discompass direction display 䊊 play will indicate the direction that the vehicle is heading. N: North E: East S: South W: West If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles. Instruments and controls 2-11 Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens: button for about 1. Press and hold the button for about 11 seconds or the 8 seconds. The current zone number will appear in the display. Release the button. 2. Find your current location on the zone map. Refer to the illustration. or the button repeat3. Press the edly to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. NOTE: Use zone number 5 for Hawaii. Inaccurate compass direction: WIC0355 2-12 Instruments and controls The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct direction is not shown, follow this procedure. 1. With the display turned on, press and hold the for about 10 seconds. The “C” icon in the compass display will illuminate. 2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h). 3. After completing the circles, the display should return to normal. CAUTION ● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass. ● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. Instruments and controls 2-13 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue) Automatic Transmission check warning light Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) Hill descent control system on indicator light (if so equipped) Automatic transmission oil temperature warning light (if so equipped) Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Automatic transmission park warning light model) ( Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive off indicator light (A/T models only) or Automatic transmission position indicator light (if so equipped) Security indicator light (if so equipped) Charge warning light Cruise main switch indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light for models with ABLS Door open warning light Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light for models with VDC Engine oil pressure warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system on indicator light (if so equipped) Transfer 4LO position indicator light model) ( 4WD warning light ( 4WD shift indicator light ( Turn signal/hazard indicator lights or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Brake warning light model) Low fuel warning light 2-14 Instruments and controls Front passenger air bag status light model) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: , or , , , , The following lights come on briefly and then go off: or , , , , , , , , If any light fails to come on, it may indicate an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly. WARNING LIGHTS or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See “Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” section. Automatic Transmission check warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Automatic transmission oil temperature warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the automatic transmission oil temperature is too high. If the light comes on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as soon as safely possible until the light turns off. CAUTION Continued vehicle operation when the A/T oil temperature warning light is on may damage the automatic transmission. Automatic transmission park warning light ( model) WARNING ● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that the automatic transmission P (Park) position will not function and the transfer case is in neutral. ● When parking, always make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set. Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting in serious personal injury or property damage. ● Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP warning light when the shift lever is in the P position and the ATP warning light is ON. (Before shifting the 4WD switch into the 4LO position, move the shift lever into the N position once, shift the shift lever into P again and make sure the ATP warning light is OFF.) Instruments and controls 2-15 This light indicates that the automatic transmission parking function is not engaged. If the transfer control is not secured in any drive position while the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the transmission will disengage and the drive wheels will not lock. or Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 2-16 Instruments and controls WARNING ● Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. ● Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. ● If the brake fluid MINIMUM or MIN fluid reservoir, do brake system has NISSAN dealer. level is below the mark on the brake not drive until the been checked at a Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv- ing and abrupt braking. See “Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” in this section. Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. CAUTION ● Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. Refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section later in this manual. ● Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing. Door open warning light This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Engine oil pressure warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so. 4WD warning light ( model) The 4WD warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the engine is started. If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting and driving” section. CAUTION ● If the warning light comes on or blinks during operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads: – in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. – in the 4LO position for automatic transmission models, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. – in the 4LO position for manual transmission models, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position with the clutch pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD, ● If the warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Low fuel warning light This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty). Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare. The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off. Instruments and controls 2-17 Low tire pressure warning: If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is also displayed in the odometer. When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. 2-18 Instruments and controls For additional information, see “Check tire pressure warning message” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and in the “In case of emergency” section. TPMS malfunction: If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is not displayed if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. For additional information, see “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. WARNING ● If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. ● If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is not displayed if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. ● Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. CAUTION ● The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly. ● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly. ● Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly. Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Seat belt warning light and chime Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer: The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely fastened. ● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds. The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger. Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly. For additional details see “Supplemental restraint system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section for precautions on seat belt usage. ● The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. ● The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Instruments and controls 2-19 WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems, and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. INDICATOR LIGHTS Automatic transmission position indicator light (if so equipped) See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Cruise main switch indicator light (if so equipped) The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational. 2-20 Instruments and controls Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) 4WD shift indicator light model) ( The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The light should turn off within 1 second after placing the ignition switch in the ON position. Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system on indicator light (if so equipped) The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other. This light comes on when the electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fully engaged. The indicator light flashes when the system is first turned on. When the system fully engages, the light remains on. If the switch is on and the indicator light continues to flash, the system is not engaged. For additional information, see “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” later in this section and “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator light will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch. Front passenger air bag status light The front passenger air bag status light ( ) will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used. For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. High beam indicator light (blue) Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected. If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gal (11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank. Hill descent control system on indicator light (if so equipped) When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on briefly and then turns off. light should After a few driving trips, the turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. The light comes on when the hill descent control system is activated. If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. If the hill descent control switch is on and the indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged. If the indicator light does not come on when the hill descent switch is on, the system may not be functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Hill descent control switch” later in this section and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Operation The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in one of two ways: ● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message is displayed in the odometer. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. light should turn off after a few The driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. ● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage: – do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). – avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. – avoid steep uphill grades. – if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. Instruments and controls 2-21 The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system. Overdrive OFF indicator light (A/T models only) For additional information, see “Security systems” later in this section. Slip indicator light for models with ABLS This indicator light comes on if the active brake limited slip is activated. If activated, the system will apply braking to the slipping drive wheel(s), giving the non-slipping wheel(s) more traction. Slip indicator light for models with VDC This light comes on when the overdrive function is OFF. This indicator will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be slippery. The automatic transmission overdrive function is controlled by the overdrive switch. Transfer 4LO position indicator model) light ( See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Security indicator light (if so equipped) This light blinks when the ignition switch is in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. 2-22 Instruments and controls The light should turn off within 1 second after turning the ignition switch to ON. This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition switch in the ON position. The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the switch while driving. Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other. The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear. If the shift lever is shifted from the N (Neutral) position to any other gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the vehicle may move unexpectedly. When you shift between 4H and 4LO, follow the instructions below: ● For automatic transmission models, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed, then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H. ● For manual transmission models, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position with the clutch pedal depressed, then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H. You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the N position with the brake pedal (A/T models) or clutch pedal (M/T models) depressed. Turn signal/hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, the transfer case is in the 4LO position ( model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not functioning properly. This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not operating. Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning If the battery is removed or discharged, the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is disabled and the VDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. To reset the system, you must perform the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. If the light does not go off after performing the reset procedure, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle. While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal. The VDC system will be disabled and the VDC light will illuminate when the electronic locking rear differential (E-lock) system switch (if so equipped) is turned on and the E-lock system is engaged. If the E-lock system disengages or the switch is turned off, the VDC system will be enabled and the VDC light will turn off. Key reminder chime Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle. Instruments and controls 2-23 SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped) The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. LIC0359 Your vehicle may have two types of security systems: ● Vehicle security system (if so equipped) ● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so equipped) VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so equipped) The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection-type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. 2-24 Instruments and controls Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features. How to arm the vehicle security system 1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.) 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the key, power door lock switch (if the door is opened, locked and then closed), or with the keyfob. Keyfob operation: button on the keyfob. ● Push the All doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked. button is pushed with ● When the all doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section later in this manual. indicator light comes 4. Confirm that the light stays on for about on. The 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts light begins into the armed phase. The to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON position, the system will not arm. ● If the key is turned slowly when locking the driver’s door, the system may not arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key, the system may be disarmed when the key is removed. If the indicator light fails to glow for a period of time, unlock the door once and lock it again. ● Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will arm with all doors closed and locked with the ignition switch placed in the OFF position. Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: ● The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently. ● The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door button with the key or by pressing the on the keyfob. The alarm is activated by: ● opening a door without using the key or keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch). How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s button door with the key or by pressing the on the keyfob. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (if so equipped) The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key. If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds. Instruments and controls 2-25 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH For Canada: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. LIC0474 SWITCH OPERATION The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational. The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. 1 䊊 If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service. 2-26 Instruments and controls WIC0854 Security indicator light Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed: 2 䊊 3 䊊 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A (Slower) or 䊊 B (Faster). 䊊 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation High (HI) — continuous high speed operation 4 to have one sweep operaPush the lever up 䊊 tion (MIST) of the wiper. 5 to operate the Pull the lever toward you 䊊 washer. The wiper will also operate several times. WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield. REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so equipped) ● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water. CAUTION ● Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds. ● Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty. ● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshieldwasher fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. LIC0783 Type A To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster. Instruments and controls 2-27 HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH LIC1419 WIC1424 Type B Type A HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 2-28 Instruments and controls When turning the switch to the position, the front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights come on. When turning the switch to the position, the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on. Type B headlight control switch is equipped with front LED accent lights. WIC1452 Type B CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. To turn on the autolight system: 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi1 . tion 䊊 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset. WIC1426 Type C WIC1453 Autolight system (if so equipped) To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to , or position. the OFF, The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can: ● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark. ● Turn off all the lights when it is light. ● Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you turn the key to OFF and all doors are closed. Instruments and controls 2-29 After the headlights automatically turn off with the or position, headlight switch in the the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position and then or position. turned to the CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. LIC0835 Be sure you do not put anything on top of 1 located in the top the autolight sensor 䊊 side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the switch in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged. WIC1427 Headlight beam select 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on light illuminates. and the Pull the lever back to select the low beam. Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off. Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will turn off after a period of time. 2-30 Instruments and controls DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM (Canada only) The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the position. Turn the OFF position or in the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. WARNING When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. WIC0917 WIC1428 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL TURN SIGNAL SWITCH The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the AUTO (if so or position. equipped), 1 䊊 A to adjust the brightness of the Turn the control 䊊 instrument panel lights when driving at night. Turn signal Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically. Lane change signal 2 䊊 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. The turn signal will flash three times automatically. Instruments and controls 2-31 HORN CARGO LAMP SWITCH LIC0393 WIC1449 LIC0616 FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) To sound the horn, push the area between the horn icons on the steering wheel. To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switch down to the ON position. To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the fog light switch to the position. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to position. the To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected. 2-32 Instruments and controls WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will go dead. HEATED SEATS (if so equipped) The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. 1. Start the engine. 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. 3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. LIC1041 WARNING Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury. CAUTION ● Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. ● Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. ● Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. ● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. ● When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials. ● If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. ● The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. Instruments and controls 2-33 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if so equipped) ● The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury. CAUTION LIC1548 LIC0743 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF indicator will come on. switch. The Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section. ● Never rely solely on the hill descent control system to control vehicle speed when driving on steep downhill grades. Always drive carefully when using the hill descent control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. 2-34 Instruments and controls WARNING When the hill descent control system operates continuously for a long time, the temperature of the brake pads may increase and the hill descent control system may be temporarily disabled (the indicator light will blink). If the indicator light does not come on continuously after blinking, stop using the system. The hill descent control system is designed to reduce driver workload when going down steep hills. The hill descent control system helps to control vehicle speed so the driver can concentrate on steering the vehicle. To activate the hill descent control system: ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4L position and the vehicle speed must be under 15 MPH (25 km/h) or ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM SWITCH (if so equipped) ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4H position and the vehicle speed must be under 21 MPH (35 km/h), and ● the hill descent control system switch must be ON. When the E-Lock switch is turned ON, the indicator light will flash until the system engages. However, if all operation conditions listed above are not met or the system becomes disengaged, the indicator light will continue to flash. The hill descent control system on indicator light will come on when the system is activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent control system applies the brakes to control vehicle speed. The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON. If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the hill descent control system begins to function again if the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled. See “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and Driving” section for further explanation and system limitations. The hill descent control system on indicator light blinks if the switch is on and all conditions for system activation are not met or if the system becomes disengaged for any reason. To turn off the hill descent control system, push the switch to the OFF position. For additional information, see “Hill descent control system on indicator light” earlier in this section and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. LIC0729 The Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system can help provide added traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck. To activate the E-Lock system: ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position (4-wheel drive vehicles), ● the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4 MPH (7 km/h) or less, and WARNING ● Never leave the E-Lock system ON when driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels slipping and result in an accident and personal injury. After using the E-Lock system to free the vehicle, turn the system OFF. ● the E-Lock system switch must be turned ON. Instruments and controls 2-35 CLUTCH INTERLOCK (clutch start) SWITCH (if so equipped) To use the clutch interlock switch: ● Use the E-Lock system only when freeing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position before using the E-Lock system. Never use the E-Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice surface. Using the E-Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected movement of the vehicle during engine braking, accelerating or turning, which may result in an accident and serious personal injury. 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Depress the brake pedal with your right foot. 3. Place your left foot on the brake pedal and release the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 5. Press and release the clutch interlock switch. The CANCEL light on the switch will illuminate. CAUTION ● After using the E-Lock system, turn the switch OFF to prevent possible damage to driveline components from extended use. ● Do not drive over 12 MPH (20 km/h) when the system is engaged. Doing so could result in possible damage to the driveline. ● Do not turn on the E-lock system while the tires are spinning. Doing so could damage drivetrain components. 2-36 Instruments and controls WIC0817 WARNING Pay special attention to your surroundings when using the clutch interlock switch. The vehicle will move forward or backward according to the gear selected. The clutch interlock (clutch start) switch allows for starting the engine without depressing the clutch pedal. This feature helps you restart the engine if it stops under difficult conditions. (For example, the engine stops on a steep hill and a slight movement forward or backward might be dangerous.) 6. Turn the ignition to the START position to start the engine and, at the same time, depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot. As the vehicle begins to move, take your left foot off the brake. Once the engine has started, the clutch interlock switch CANCEL light shuts off. Do not use the interlock switch to start the engine under normal driving conditions. REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (if so equipped) POWER OUTLET The rear sonar system can be disabled by pushing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled, the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. See “Rear sonar system (if so equipped)” in the “Starting and driving” section. LIC1430 LIC0471 WARNING The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly. The rear sonar system (if so equipped) is active when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse). Front row The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The power outlets are powered only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Open the cap to use a power outlet. When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted. Instruments and controls 2-37 STORAGE ● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. ● Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on. ● Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. LIC0761 Center console CAUTION ● The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. ● Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. See your NISSAN dealer for additional information. ● Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. ● Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. 2-38 Instruments and controls ● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open. ● When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquids to contact the outlet. LIC1539 Top center tray STORAGE TRAYS WARNING Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop. LIC0818 A/T model WIC1431 M/T model — Type A (if so equipped) WIC1432 M/T model — Type B (if so equipped) Instruments and controls 2-39 UNDER-SEAT STORAGE BINS WARNING ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ● The cargo restrained in the under-seat storage bins must not exceed the weight limits listed below or the bins may not stay secured. In a sudden stop or collision, the unsecured bins could cause personal injury. King cab model: 16 lb (7.25 kg) Crew cab model Driver’s side: 16 lb (7.25 kg) Passenger’s side: 25 lb (11.33 kg) LIC0821 2nd row under-seat storage bin (King cab model) 2-40 Instruments and controls LIC0820 2nd row under-seat storage bin (Crew cab model) ● If the under-seat storage bins are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. ● Do not place sharp objects in the underseat storage bins. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury when the vehicle is moving or if the vehicle is involved in a collision. To access the under-seat storage bins: For King cab model, lift up the jump seat. Refer to “Jump seat (King cab)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section earlier in this manual. For Crew cab model, lift up the rear bench seat. Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat down” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section earlier in this manual. LIC0822 To remove the under-seat storage bins: 1. Remove the storage net. 2. Remove the tray by lifting it out of the storage bin (King cab model). LIC0766 CONSOLE BOX 1 to open the console box lid Pull up on the lever 䊊 2 . 䊊 2 . 3. Turn the knobs to the UNLOCK position 䊊 To install the under-seat storage bins: 1. Position the under-seat storage bin so the holes line up with the holes in the floorboard. 2. Insert the knobs and turn them to the LOCK 1 . position 䊊 Instruments and controls 2-41 CAUTION ● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. ● Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. LIC0768 GLOVE BOX To open the top portion of the glove box, push the A up and raise the lid. latch 䊊 To open the lower portion of the glove box, pull B down and lower the lid. the handle 䊊 WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. 2-42 Instruments and controls WIC0673 SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if so equipped) To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. WARNING ● Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident. LIC0826 WIC0824 MAP POCKETS King cab model LIC0825 Crew cab model Instruments and controls 2-43 CAUTION ● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. ● Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. WIC0827 LIC0575 Front SEAT POCKET (if so equipped) A pocket is located on the back of the driver’s seat. CUP HOLDERS The front cup holders have adapters that can be removed to accommodate larger cups. WARNING The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. 2-44 Instruments and controls WIC0771 LIC0784 2nd row (rear of front console) To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid. If stepped on, the cup holder is designed to snap loose from the console. To re-install, close the cup holder assembly and push it back into the console opening. Bottle holder (front row) ● Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. To fold the 2nd row bench seat back, first close the cup holder. ● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers. WIC0828 Bottle holder (2nd row, Crew cab) CAUTION Instruments and controls 2-45 WARNING ● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the roof rack. ● Heavy loading of the roof rack has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or abnormal handling maneuvers. ● Roof rack load should be evenly distributed. ● Do not exceed maximum roof rack load weight capacity. ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. WIC0857 ROOF RACK (if so equipped) 2-46 Instruments and controls CAUTION Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack. If you cannot comfortably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a ladder or stool. WINDOWS Always evenly distribute the cargo on the tubular roof rack. The maximum total load is 125 lb (56 kg) evenly distributed. Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s side door jamb pillar). For more information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section later in this manual. The front crossbar can be adjusted or removed. Use the Torxdriver provided in the tool kit to loosen both crossbar adjusting screws. To adjust: 1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the Torx1 by turning counterclockwise 䊊 A. driver 䊊 2. When the clamp is loosened, move the crossbar so the cargo can be positioned on B. the crossbar 䊊 To remove: 1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the Torx1 by turning counterclockwise 䊊 A. driver 䊊 C. 2. Rotate the clamps 䊊 3. Remove the crossbar. 4. Reverse to install. 5. Always check the tightness of the crossbar adjusting screws. If you hear wind noise coming from the roof rack while driving, adjust the roof rack crossbar to the neutral position, rearward of on the side rails. POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped) WARNING ● Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. ● Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled. 3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws with the Torxdriver by turning clockwise. 4. Secure the cargo with rope. 5. Always check the tightness of the crossbar adjusting screws. Instruments and controls 2-47 Driver’s side power window switch The driver’s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear passenger windows. To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch. LIC1329 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Window lock button Power door lock switch Front passenger side window switch Right rear passenger window switch (Crew Cab models only) Left rear passenger window switch (Crew Cab models only) Driver’s side automatic switch 2-48 Instruments and controls LIC0786 Front passenger’s power window switch The passenger’s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger’s window. To open 1 . the window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊 2 . To close the window, pull the switch up 䊊 LIC0787 Rear power window switch (Crew Cab models only) The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding passenger window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it 1 . To close the window, push the switch down 䊊 2 . up 䊊 LIC0410 WIC0263 Automatic operation MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped) To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening. The side windows can be opened or closed by turning the hand crank on each door. Locking passengers’ windows When the window lock button is depressed, only the driver’s side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function. Instruments and controls 2-49 MOONROOF (if so equipped) Tilting the moonroof Close the moonroof by pushing the switch to2 . Release the switch, then ward UP/CLOSE 䊊 push the UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt the moonroof up. To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch to1 . ward DOWN/OPEN 䊊 Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof) WIC0856 REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so equipped) 1 , then slide Squeeze the handles of the lever 䊊 2 . the window open 䊊 WIC0882 Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to1 . ward DOWN/OPEN 䊊 To fully close the moonroof, push the switch 2 . toward UP/CLOSE 䊊 To open or close the moonroof part way, push the switch in any direction while the moonroof is sliding to stop it in the desired position. The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs. WARNING There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof. 2-50 Instruments and controls When closing: CAUTION If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof will immediately open backward. When tilting down: If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up. If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof. ● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening. ● Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area. Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward. If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof. LIC0789 Type A WARNING ● In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. ● Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing. Instruments and controls 2-51 INTERIOR LIGHTS The interior lights have a three-position switch and operate regardless of ignition switch position. 1 , the When the switch is in the ON position 䊊 interior lights illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is in the ON position. 2 , When the switch is in the O (DOOR) position 䊊 the interior lights will stay on for a period of time when: LIC0792 Type B LIC0630 Type C ● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position. ● The driver’s door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch. ● The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed. The lights will turn off while the timer is activated when: ● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a key, or the power door lock switch. ● The ignition switch is turned ON. 2-52 Instruments and controls MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped) The lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged. To turn the map lights on, press the lenses. To turn them off, press the lenses of the lights again. CAUTION 3 , the When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊 interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door position. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. LIC0791 Instruments and controls 2-53 HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped) The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: ● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. ● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming. When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” later in this section. 2-54 Instruments and controls WARNING ● Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. ● During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming. ● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. NOTE: Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency. 1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink® surface, keeping the 1 in view. HomeLink® indicator light 䊊 Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps. 4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door opener’s manual. 5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. LIC2365 LIC2366 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT re1 lease until the HomeLink® indicator light 䊊 flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.) 3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. NOTE: Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in “Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers” in this section. 1 is ● If the indicator light 䊊 solid/continuous, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released. 1 blinks rapidly for ● If the indicator light 䊊 two seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink® button for two seconds and release. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence up to 3 times to complete the training process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device. 7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-3553515. Instruments and controls 2-55 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Training” procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink®” Step 2 with the following: NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components. 1. See “Programming HomeLink®” step 1 earlier in this section. 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and the hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to 2-56 Instruments and controls press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training. Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” step 3 to complete. If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it back in when programming is completed. OPERATING THE HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information: ● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. ● position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® surface. ● press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption. ● position the hand-held transmitter 1 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position – keeping the indicator light in view at all times. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button” in this section. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico). 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons. 2. Release both buttons. IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN To clear all programming: HomeLink® is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1. REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK® BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button. If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Instruments and controls 2-57 MEMO 2-58 Instruments and controls 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Locking with power door lock switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Rear doors (King Cab models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Automatic door locks (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Child safety rear door lock (Crew Cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-6 How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Tilt operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Bed Extender (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Tie down hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 KEYS A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped) You can only drive your vehicle using the master key which is registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. This key has a transponder chip in the key head. The master key can be used for all the locks. LPD0348 1. Two master keys (black) with transponder chip and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on one side. 2. Transponder chip 3. Key number plate A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep the plate in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. 3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Additional or replacement keys: If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can duplicate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle. CAUTION Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function. DOORS When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors. WARNING ● Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders. ● Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. ● Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. WPD0311 Driver’s side and Passenger side (if so equipped) LPD0240 Power (if so equipped) LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time. Manual (if so equipped) 1 of the vehicle Turning the key toward the front 䊊 locks all doors. To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the 1 . To unlock, turn the key toward the rear vehicle 䊊 2 . 䊊 2 of the Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊 vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, 3 (where the key can returning the key to neutral 䊊 only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks 4 . all doors 䊊 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition switch and any door open, all doors will lock and then unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle. LPD0298 Inside lock WPD0381 Door lock switch LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped) To lock the door without the key, move the inside 1 , then close the lock knob to the lock position 䊊 door. To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to 1 . When locking the door this the lock position 䊊 way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. To unlock the door without the key, move the 2 . inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊 To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s 2 . side) to the unlock position 䊊 3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD0278 REAR DOORS (King Cab models) 1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door. LPD0312 A 2. From the outside, pull the door handle 䊊 toward you. WPD0313 3. Open the door to the desired position. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so equipped) ● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h). ● For automatic transmission models: All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P (Park) position. ● For manual transmission models: All doors unlock automatically when the key is removed from the ignition switch. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if so equipped) The automatic unlock function can be deactivated or activated. To deactivate or activate the automatic door unlock system, perform the following procedure: WARNING ● Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. 1. Close all doors. 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2, push and hold the power door lock switch to position (UNLOCK) for more than the 5 seconds. 4. When activated, the hazard indicator will flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard indicator will flash once. 5. The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change. When the automatic door unlock system is deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position for manual transmission models or the transmission is placed in the P (Park) position for automatic transmission models. To unlock the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side). 3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments WPD0314 CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK (Crew Cab models only) ● The remote keyless entry keyfob transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the remote keyless entry keyfob while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors. When the lever is in the LOCK position, the door can be opened only from the outside. The keyfob can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective distance depends on the conditions around the vehicle. As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN dealer. The keyfob will not function when: ● the battery is discharged ● the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m) The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the keyfob: ● Do not allow the keyfob, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function. ● Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). ● Do not attach the keyfob with a key holder that contains a magnet. ● Do not place the keyfob near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers. If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. LPD0209 HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Locking doors 1. Close all windows. ● Do not drop the keyfob. 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. ● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against another object. 3. Close the hood and all doors. ● Do not change or modify the keyfob. ● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry. button on the keyfob. All 4. Press the the doors lock. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 ● When the button is pressed with all doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. button on the keyfob again Press the within 5 seconds. ● All doors unlock. ● The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed. ● If a door is open and you press button, the doors will lock the but the horn will not beep and the hazard lights will not flash. The interior lights can be turned off without waiting by inserting the key into the ignition switch and placing the ignition switch in the ON or START position, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF position. The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature” in this section for details. LPD0210 Unlocking doors Press the button on the keyfob once. ● Only the driver’s door unlocks. ● The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition switch in any position except the ON position. ● The interior lights illuminate for a period of time when the interior light switch is in the normal operation position. 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Auto relock When the button on the keyfob is pressed, all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is performed: ● Any door is opened. ● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON. Opening windows (if so equipped) Using the interior lights The keyfob allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation. Press the button on the keyfob once to turn on the interior lights. but● To open the windows, press the ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked. For additional information, refer to “Interior lights” in the “Instruments and controls” section in this manual. The door windows will open while pressing button on the keyfob. the The door windows cannot be closed by using the keyfob. LPD0211 Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention button on the by pressing and holding the keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time. The panic alarm stops when: ● it has run for a period of time, or ● any button is pressed on the keyfob. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 HOOD The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered. LPD0262 Silencing the horn beep feature If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the keyfob. To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated. To activate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more. 3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD0302 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver’s side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly. Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood. Insert the support rod into the slot on the underside of the hood. When closing the hood, return the hood rod to its original position. Lower the hood approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release it. This allows proper engagement of the hood latch. FUEL-FILLER DOOR ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. WARNING ● Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. ● If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood. LPD0263 FUEL-FILLER CAP WARNING ● Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. ● Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause Malfunction Indicator Light the (MIL) to come on. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. ● Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers: – Always place the container on the ground when filling. – Do not use electronic devices when filling. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 – Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it. – Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid. CAUTION ● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. For further information see the “Fuel Recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. ● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message will be displayed if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message is disMalfuncplayed may cause the tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. ● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. light illuminates because If the the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue light to drive the vehicle. The should turn off after a few driving trips. light does not turn off after a If the few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. ● For additional information, see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and Controls” section in this manual. ● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. LPD0325 To remove the fuel-filler cap: 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove. 1 2. Loop the tether strap around the hook 䊊 while refueling. To install the fuel-filler cap: 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuelfiller tube. 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard. 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments STEERING WHEEL 3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset butA in the meter for about 1 second to ton 䊊 turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message after tightening the fuel-filler cap. For additional information, see “Meters and gauges” in the “Instruments and Controls” section in this manual. LRS2004 LPD0304 Loose Fuel Cap warning message TILT OPERATION (if so equipped) The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message displays in the odometer when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning message, perform the following: Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position. 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as described above as soon as possible. 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks. Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel in place. WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 SUN VISORS 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out as needed. CAUTION ● Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position. ● Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward. WPD0307 VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped) To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open. WPD0344 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments MIRRORS AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating. NOTE: WPD0126 REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) 1 reduces glare from the The night position 䊊 headlights of vehicles behind you at night. 2 when driving in daylight Use the day position 䊊 hours. WARNING Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity. Do not hang any objects over the sensors 1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. 䊊 Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation. LPD0446 Type A Type A and Type B The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating. With the ignition switch in the ON position, press button as described: the ● To turn off the anti-glare feature, press button. The indicator light will turn the off. ● To turn on the anti-glare feature, press button again. The indicator light the will turn on. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 OUTSIDE MIRRORS WARNING ● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. ● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. LPD0470 Type B For information on HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) operation, see the “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. 2 and For more information about the compass 䊊 compass features (if so equipped), refer to “Compass display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments WPD0170 Manual control type (if so equipped) The outside mirror can be moved in any direction for a better rear view. TRUCK BOX LPD0237 LPD0259 LPD0270 Electric control type (if so equipped) Foldable outside mirrors TAILGATE The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position. Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. Opening the tailgate 1 to select the right or left Move the small switch 䊊 mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position 2 . using the large switch 䊊 Heated mirrors (if so equipped) Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see “Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower the tailgate. The support cables hold the tailgate open. When closing the tailgate, make sure the latches are securely locked. Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s Bed Extender (accessory) or equivalent in the extended position. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 For proper truck box loading see “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. WARNING ● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. ● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. LPD2097 Disconnecting the rear camera (if so equipped) Before removing the tailgate disconnect the rear camera by performing the following: 1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera 1 located on the rear connector bracket 䊊 sill. 2 from the 2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊 sill by pressing the locking tab inward, in the direction shown, while pulling the bracket apart. 3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness 䊊 by pressing inward on the locking tab, in the direction shown, while pulling the connectors apart. Hold the connector firmly to prevent the connector in the chassis harness from falling into the sill. 4. Take the chassis plug and bracket from the glove box and connect them to the chassis wiring harness to avoid contamination to the terminals which will lead to malfunction of the rear camera. 5. Insert the bracket back into the sill. 6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove box and connect it to the tailgate wiring harness to avoid contamination which will lead to malfunction of the rear camera. Installing the tailgate 1. Insert the tailgate into the left side hinge. 2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle and insert into the right side hinge. 7. Remove the tailgate. See “Removing the tailgate” in this section. 3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle and attach the tailgate support cables. 4. Close the tailgate securely. LPD2208 Removing the tailgate 1. Release the tailgate support cables. CAUTION ● The tailgate is heavy. Two people should remove or install it. Be careful not to drop it during removal. ● After releasing the support cables, do not let the tailgate rest on the bumper. 2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle. 3. Pull the tailgate out from the right side hinge. 4. Slide the tailgate out of the left side hinge. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 LPD2097 Connecting the rear camera (if so equipped) Before closing the tailgate reconnect the rear camera by performing the following: 1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the truck, keep the tailgate open and check that the tailgate harness is not hanging below the tailgate. 2 from the 2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊 sill by pressing the locking tab inward, in the direction shown, while pulling the bracket apart. 3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3. Disconnect the chassis plug and bracket 3 . Keep from the chassis wiring harness 䊊 the connector and bracket in a safe place such as the glove box. 4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from the tailgate wiring harness. Keep the tailgate plug in a safe place such as the glove box. 5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness to the chassis wiring harness. 6. Securely fix the rear camera connector 1 to the rear sill. bracket 䊊 7. Close the tailgate securely. LPD0272 Locking the tailgate To lock the tailgate, turn the key toward the pas1 . To unlock, turn the senger side of the vehicle 䊊 2 . key toward the driver side 䊊 BED EXTENDER (if so equipped) CAUTION ● Do not overload the bed extender. Maximum load on the open tailgate is 890N (200 lbs). ● Evenly distribute and properly secure all cargo. ● Do not use the bed extender or tailgate to secure cargo. LPD0480 Positioning the bed extender To use the bed extender in the inward position perform the following: 1 toward the cab 1. Rotate the bed extender 䊊 of the truck. 2. If necessary, remove tethers from the tailgate latch. 3. Tighten the knobs to secure the extender into the desired position. 4. Close the tailgate. 5. Place cargo inside the bed extender in the truck bed. 6. Properly secure the cargo. LPD0479 To use the bed extender in the outward position perform the following: 1. Open the tailgate. 2 away from the 2. Rotate the bed extender 䊊 cab of the truck until the extender sits on the tailgate. 3 into the tailgate latch on 3. Lock the buckles 䊊 both sides. The bed extender can be adjusted in the outward position by moving the extender along the rail. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 NOTE: WARNING Use care when rotating extender, buckles may come in contact with the truck bed railing. ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Removing and installing the bed extender To remove or install the bed extender perform the following: 1. Open the tailgate. 2. Rotate the bed extender into a vertical position and lift straight up (to remove) or lower straight down (to install). To store the bed extender in the front of the truck when not in use perform the following: 1. Position the sliding brackets past the center of the wheel well. 2. Re-install the extender into the brackets (see above). 3. Rotate the extender to the inward position. 4. Push the brackets forward until the extender comes in contact with the front wall of the truck box. 3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LTI0102 TIE DOWN HOOKS (if so equipped) For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed at each corner of the truck box. These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box. ● The weight of the cargo load must be evenly distributed over both the front and the rear axles. ● All cargo should be securely fastened with ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or sliding within the vehicle. 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Control panel buttons — color screen with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 How to use the APPS – i button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 How to use the ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 How to use the CAMERA button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Heater and Air Conditioner (manual) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 USB interface (models without Navigation System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 USB interface (models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 iPod®* player operation without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 iPod®* player operation with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Pandora® audio (United States only) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 NissanConnect™ App Smartphone Integration (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Registering with NissanConnect™ App. . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Connect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Application Download. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Voice Adaptation (VA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Connecting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86 NISSAN Voice Recognition System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86 System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88 Navigation System voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 Audio system voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 Information voice commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 My Apps Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 Help voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) WARNING ● Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. ● Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock. ● Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. ● In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. LHA2898 1. MAP button* 6. BACK button 2. Display screen 7. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob 3. button** 8. CAMERA button 4. button 9. NAV button* 5. (brightness control) button 4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems * For information regarding the Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. ** For information regarding the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System control button, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with navigation system” or “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without navigation system” in this section. When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: “Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen. HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN CAUTION ● The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury. WARNING ● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving. ● Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. ● To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel. ● Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction. To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving. The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be “grayed out” or muted. Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 LHA2873 Touch screen operation Menu Item Selecting the item Adjusting the item Inputting characters 123/ABC Space Delete OK Result 1 on the screen. Touch the “BACK” key to return to the previous screen. Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key䊊 Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time, or touch the double up arrow to scroll up an entire page. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time, or touch the double down arrow to scroll down an entire page. Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters. Changes the available character set to numbers. Inserts a space. Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the characters. Completes the character input. Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen. 4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen. LHA2773 HOW TO USE THE APPS – I BUTTON For more information about the “SiriusXM Travel Link”, and “SiriusXM Traffic” features, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. For more information about the “My Apps” key, see “NissanConnect™ App Smartphone Integration” in this section. LHA2916 To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Touch the “Settings” key. 3. Touch the desired item. For more information about the “Voice Commands” key, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 Menu item Audio Navigation Phone & Bluetooth System Display Brightness Display Mode Scroll Direction Clock Time Format Date Format Clock Mode Set Clock Manually Daylight Savings Time Time Zone Language Camera Display Mode Brightness Contrast Color Result See “Audio system” in this section for more information. See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for more information. See “Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear. Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. Adjusts the brightness of the display. Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically. Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down. Touch this key to adjust the time. The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours. Select from five possible formats of displaying the day, month, and year. Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down. “Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available. Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off. Choose the applicable time zone from the list. Touch this key to change the language on the display. Touch this key to change the camera settings. Touch this key to select the touchscreen display mode (day, night, or automatic). Adjust touchscreen brightness. Adjust touchscreen contrast. Adjust touchscreen color. 4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Menu item Temperature Unit Touchscreen click System Beeps Return to Factory Settings/ Clear Memory Software Licenses Traffic SXM Result Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius). Toggles the touchscreen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the screen is touched. Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up message appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds. Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory. Touch this key to display software licensing information. Touch this key to display traffic settings. See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for more information. Touch this key to display SXM status information. For SXM setup, refer to “Audio System” in this section. BUTTON To change the display brightness, press the button. Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display. If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the display will return to the previous display. HOW TO USE THE ON-OFF BUTTON/VOL (volume) CONTROL KNOB Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio function on and off. Turn the volume control knob to adjust audio volume. HOW TO USE THE CAMERA BUTTON For more information regarding the CAMERA button, see “REARVIEW MONITOR” in this section. button for more than Press and hold the two seconds to turn the display off. Press the button again to turn the display on. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped) When the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows a rearward view from the vehicle. WARNING ● The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground. ● The RearView Monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly. ● When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock. ● Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock. CAUTION There is a plastic cover over the camera. Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow from the cover. LHA0437 HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES ● Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used. Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the A are displayed on the monitor. vehicle body line 䊊 ● Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed beside the license plate light. Distance guide lines: Indicate distances from the vehicle body. 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) ● Red line 䊊 2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) ● Yellow line 䊊 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) ● Green line 䊊 4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m) ● Green line 䊊 4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects. LHA2278 The on-screen guidelines can be set to on or off. With the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position: Press the CAMERA button to toggle the feature on and off. With the shift lever in any position other than the R (Reverse) position: LHA2326 1. Press the CAMERA button. Backing up on a steep uphill 2. Select the “Show Guidelines” key to toggle the feature on or off. When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on place 䊊 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 B . Note that any object on the hill is the place 䊊 the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. B . Note that any object on the hill is the place 䊊 the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor. LHA2327 Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on place 䊊 4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems A if the object projects over the the position 䊊 actual backing up course. LHA2254 Without Navigation System ADJUSTING THE SCREEN The procedure for adjusting the quality of the screen differs depending on the type of screen present on the vehicle. For vehicles without Navigation System: LHA2328 Backing up behind a projecting object C is shown farther than the position The position 䊊 B in the display. However, the position 䊊 C is 䊊 A. actually at the same distance as the position 䊊 The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to 1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button. 2. Turn the TUNE-SCROLL knob to highlight the “Brightness” or “Contrast” key. 3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 4. Adjust the level using the TUNE-SCROLL knob and then press the ENTER/SETTING button to apply the adjustment. OPERATING TIPS ● When the shift lever is shifted to R (Reverse), the monitor screen automatically changes to the RearView Monitor mode. However, the radio can be heard. ● Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. LHA2892 With Navigation System For vehicles with Navigation System: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Select the “Settings” key. 3. Select the “System” key. 4. Select the “Display” key. 5. Touch the “Brightness” key and adjust the level to the desired setting. ● Do not adjust the display of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. 4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● It may take some time until the RearView Monitor is displayed after the shift lever has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects may be distorted momentarily until the RearView Monitor screen is displayed completely. When the shift lever is returned to a position other than R (Reverse), it may take some time until the screen changes. Objects on the screen may be distorted until they are completely displayed. ● When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects. This is not a malfunction. ● When strong light directly enters the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly. ● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. This is not a malfunction. ● The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction. VENTS ● The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object. ● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark place or at night. This is not a malfunction. ● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects. Clean the camera. ● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth. ● Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected. ● Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe off the wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water. LHA0534 Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas1 , driver and passenger senger’s side windows 䊊 2 , or center 䊊 3 vent by moving the vent slide 䊊 and/or vent assemblies. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped) WARNING ● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. ● Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. ● Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. NOTE: ● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. WHA1406 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Fan speed control dial Front window defroster button Rear window defroster switch (if so equipped) Air recirculation button Temperature control dial Max A/C button Air flow control buttons Air conditioner ON/OFF button ● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle. 4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CONTROLS Fan control dial The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed. Air flow control buttons The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. MAX A/C — Air flows from center and side vents with maximum cooling (air conditioning). — Air flows from center and side vents. — Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from foot outlets. — Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. Air recirculation button ON position (Indicator light on): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the button to the on position when: ● driving on a dusty road. ● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment. ● for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner. OFF position (Indicator light off): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet. HEATER OPERATION Heating Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation. This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets. Air conditioner button Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the desired position and press the button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light comes on when the air conditioner is operating. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) For more information about the rear window defroster switch, see “Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. button to the OFF position 1. Press the for normal heating. The indicator light on button will go off. the 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents. button to the OFF position. 1. Press the The indicator light on the button will go off. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 Defrosting or defogging Bi-level heating This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows. The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets. 1. Press the defrost/defog button . 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. ● To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan control dial to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position. position is selected, the air ● When the conditioner automatically turns on (the indibutton will come on) cator light on the if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps mode audefog the windshield. The tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. button to the OFF position. 1. Press the button will The indicator light on the go off. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Press the air flow control button. 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. 4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems position is selected, the air ● When the conditioner automatically turns on (however, button will the indicator light on the not come on) if the outside temperature is air flow more than 36°F (2°C). If the control button is selected for more than one minute, the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or the A/C button is used to turn off the compressor even if the air flow control dial is turned to position. a position other than the This dehumidifies the air which helps defog mode automatithe windshield. The cally turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation. AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Dehumidified heating Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the desired position, and press the button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation. This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the button to the OFF position. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. 4. Press the button. The indicator light on the button will come on. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. ● For quick cooling when the outside tembutton to perature is high, push the the ON position. The indicator light on button will come on. Be sure to the return the to the OFF position for normal cooling. The indicator light on the button will go off. You may also select MAX A/C for quick cooling. 1. Press the button to the OFF position. button will The indicator light on the go off. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. 4. Press the light on the button on. The indicator button will come on. 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Dehumidified defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air. 1. Press the air flow control button. 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position. 3. Press the comes on. button. The indicator light or positions are seWhen the lected, the air conditioner automatically turns on (however, the indicator light will not illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF, the air conditioner is turned OFF, or the vehicle is air shut off, even if a position other than the flow control button is selected. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. mode automatically turns off, allowing The outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. Operating tips ● Keep the windows closed while the air conditioner is in operation. ● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. ● The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. ● If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. For additional information on heating and cooling, see “Heater and air conditioner (manual)” in this section. The air recir) button should always be in culation ( the OFF position for heating and defrosting. LHA2059 4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2060 LHA2061 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 LHA2062 4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems WHA1362 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped) LHA2886 Type A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Driver temperature control dial A/C ON/OFF button Front window defroster button Fan speed control dial (System OFF) button Fresh air intake button Air recirculation button Passenger temperature control dial DUAL button Air flow control buttons AUTO button Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 ● Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner. NOTE: ● Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. LHA2611 Type B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Driver temperature control dial A/C ON/OFF button Front window defroster button Fan speed control dial (System OFF) button Rear window defroster button Air recirculation button Passenger temperature control dial DUAL button Air flow control buttons AUTO button WARNING ● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. ● Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. 4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling or heating (auto) This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 1. Press the AUTO button on. 2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Driver and passenger temperatures can be set independently. Press DUAL to activate dual climate control functions. Turn the passenger’s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger’s temperature. ● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F (24°C) for normal operation. ● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off are also controlled automatically. ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. Heating (A/C OFF) The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode. ● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. ● Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly. ● Not recommended if windows fog up. Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1. Press the defroster control button to turn the system on. The indicator light in the button will illuminate. 2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. control is activated, the air ● When the conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more than one minute, the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control is turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off or the A/C button is used to turn off the compressor even if an air flow is selected. This button other than dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The air recirculation mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control dial ● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, turn the manual fan control to the maximum position. Turn the fan speed control dial left or right to manually control the fan speed or turn the system on or off. ● As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the auto mode. Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed. 1. Press the A/C button. The A/C indicator will turn off. 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 Air recirculation To turn system off Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. Push the AUTO button to return to automatic mode. Press the The air recirculation button will not be activated when the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, or floor/defrost mode. Fresh air intake (if so equipped) Press the fresh air intake button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. indicator light on the button will come The on. Air flow control Press the air flow control buttons to manually control air flow and select the air outlet: /OFF button. Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped) For more information about the rear window defroster switch, see “Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. OPERATING TIPS ● When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally. — Air flows from center and side vents. — Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from foot outlets. — Air flows from defroster and foot outlets. — Air flows from defroster outlets. 4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LIC0515 1 , located on the top center The sunload sensor 䊊 of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor. SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. RADIO This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system. WARNING The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment. With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON position, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition should be placed in the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality. Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception. However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system. Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception. Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. FM RADIO RECEPTION Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a lineof-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response. Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound. AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so equipped) When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data. No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal. If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna. A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights. 4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA0099 AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Compact disc (CD) player CAUTION ● Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD player. ● Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD player. ● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time. ● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging. ● During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. ● The player may skip while driving on rough roads. ● The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high or low. Decrease/increase the temperature before use. ● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight. ● CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly. ● The following CDs may not work properly: ● Copy control compact discs (CCCD) ● Recordable compact discs (CD-R) ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) ● Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction: CHECK DISC: ● Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up, etc.). ● Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches. PRESS EJECT: This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button. After a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal. ● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter UNPLAYABLE: ● CDs that are not round The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped) CD). ● CDs with a paper label ● CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges ● This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to record or burn CDs. ● If the CD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 Compact disc with MP3 or WMA (if so equipped) Terms: ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second. ● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t hear. ● Multisession — Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession. ● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality. * Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. ● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title line on the display. ● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file. 4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems WHA1078 Playback order chart Playback order: Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated. ● The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display. ● If there is a file in the top level of the disc, “Root Folder” is displayed. ● The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. Specification chart: Supported media Supported file systems MP3 Supported versions*1 WMA Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Version Sampling frequency Bit rate Tag information Folder levels Text character number limitation Displayable character codes*2 CD, CD-R, CD-RW ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5 8 kHz - 48 kHz 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 32 kHz - 48 kHz 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only) Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder) 128 characters 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian) *1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. *2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 Troubleshooting guide: Symptom Cannot play Poor sound quality It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing. Music cuts off or skips Skipping with high bit rate files Moves immediately to the next song when playing Songs do not play back in the desired order Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctly. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the disc is protected by copyright. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Bit rate may be too low. If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data. When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. 4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems USB (Universal Serial Bus) memory (if so equipped) WARNING Do not connect/disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. CAUTION ● Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. ● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover. ● Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary. This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer. In some states/area, the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked. This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system. ● Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly. ● Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended. General notes for USB use: ● Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. Notes for iPod® use: ● Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly. ● An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod®. ● An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation. ● An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation). ● Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod®. ● Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover. ● If an iPod® automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover. iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so equipped) ● Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system. ● It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth® audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module before using the Bluetooth® audio. ● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system. ● While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual. ● This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP). BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon and Bosch. ● The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under the following conditions: ● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free Phone System. ● Checking the connection to the handsfree phone. ● Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. 4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 12. VOL (volume) control knob / power button 13. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 14. TRACK button 15. SEEK button FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped) For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” in this section. Audio main operation VOL (volume) control knob / power button Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, then press the VOL (volume) control knob / power button. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, place the ignition in the ACC position. The mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes playing. LHA2241 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CD eject button CD insert slot SCAN button DISP button RPT/RDM button TUNE/FOLDER knob / MENU button 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. AUX IN jack AUX button CD button AM button FM button When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on. Pressing the VOL (volume) control knob / power button again turns the system off. Turn the VOL (volume) control knob / power button to the right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 MENU button (Bass, Treble, Balance, Fade, Speed Sensitive Volume and Clock): Press the MENU button to change the mode as follows: Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade → Spd. Sen. Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) → AUX IN Volume → Clock → Clock Adjust To adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press the MENU button until the desired mode SEEK or appears in the display. Press the button to adjust the setting to the TRACK desired level (-5 to +5). Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. Fade adjusts the sound between the front and rear speakers. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds. DISP (display) button: 2. Press the ENTER button. Press the DISP (display) button while a CD is playing to change the text shown in the audio display as follows: 3. “Change Hour” will appear on the screen. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the hours and then press ENTER. For CDs: 4. “Change Minute” will appear on the screen. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the minutes and then press ENTER. Running Time → Album Title: → Artist Name: → Song Title For MP3 CDs: Running Time → Folder Title: → Album Title: → Artist Name: → Song Title: If the text information is too long to fully be displayed on the screen; press and hold the DISP button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll through the rest of the text. Press the DISP (display) button while the radio is playing to toggle the audio display between station number and RDS. Clock operation Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of the audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed changes. It can be set as follows: To turn the clock display on or off, press the MENU button repeatedly until “Clock” appears on the display. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to toggle the setting (ON or OFF). OFF → LOW → MID → HIGH Clock set 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until “Adjust Clock” appears on the display. 4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds if no further adjustment is performed. FM/AM radio operation AM and FM buttons: Press the AM button to change the band to AM. If another audio source is playing when the AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. Press the FM button to change the band as follows: FM1 → FM2 → FM1 If another audio source is playing when the FM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. SEEK and TRACK (tuning) 1 to 6 Station memory operations: CD button: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for the AM band. When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns off and the last used compact disc starts to play. buttons: 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the AM or FM button. Press the SEEK button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard. to tune from high Press the TRACK button to low frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station. Press and hold either button to seek at a faster speed. SCAN (tuning) button: Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the display window. Scan tuning begins from low to high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting station that has sufficient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period stops scan tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station. 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete. SEEK and TRACK (Fast Forward, Rewind) buttons: When the SEEK button or TRACK button is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased speed while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. SEEK and TRACK buttons: If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. When the SEEK button is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginbutton several times ning. Press the SEEK to skip several tracks. Each time the button is pressed, the CD advances one additional track. The track number appears in the display window. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is played.) Compact disc (CD) player operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side up. The compact disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts to play. If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 When the TRACK button is pressed, the track being played returns to the beginning. button several times to Press the TRACK skip back several tracks. Each time the button is pressed the CD moves back one track. SCAN (CDs) button: RPT/RDM button: The scan mode is canceled once it scans through all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is pressed during scan mode. Press the RPT/RDM button while a compact disc is playing to change the play pattern as follows: CD: TRACK REPEAT → DISC RANDOM → DISC REPEAT Press the SCAN button for less than 1.5 seconds to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode. CD EJECT: MP3/WMA CD: button is pressed with a comWhen the pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected. FOLDER REPEAT → TRACK REPEAT → DISC RANDOM → FOLDER RANDOM → DISC REPEAT button is pressed while the When the compact disc is playing, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off. TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currently playing will be repeated. AUX (Auxiliary) button: DISC RANDOM: The order of the tracks on the disc will be mixed during play. DISC REPEAT: The disc currently playing will be repeated. FOLDER REPEAT: The tracks in the current folder will be repeated. The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack. FOLDER RANDOM: The order of the tracks in the folder will be mixed during play. 4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Press the MENU button repeatedly until “AUX IN Volume” appears on the screen to control the incoming volume level of the auxiliary input device. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the level between 0 and +3. 12.Station select (1 - 6) buttons 13.RDM button 14.RPT button 15.DISP button 16.VOL (volume) knob / PWR (power) button 17.CD•AUX button 18.FM•AM button *No satellite radio reception is available when the XM button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. LHA2501 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. CD eject button XM button* CD insert slot Display screen SEEK button SCAN button 7. CAT button 8. BACK button 9. iPod MENU button 10.TUNE/SCROLL knob, ENTER/SETTING button 11.AUX IN jack Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so equipped) For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” in this section. Audio main operation VOL (volume) knob / PWR (power) button: Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the VOL (volume) knob / PWR (power) button while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To turn the system off, press the VOL (volume) knob / PWR (power) button. Turn the VOL (volume) knob / PWR (power) button to adjust the volume. LHA2257 LHA2258 ENTER/SETTING button: Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show the Settings screen on the display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the options and then press the ENTER/SETTING button to make a selection. Speed Sensitive Volume adjusts the volume of the audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed changes. The feature can be turned off or set to a level of 1 to 5. Level 5 represents the highest degree of volume adjustment. Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade AUX Vol. Increase or decrease the level of bass, treble, balance or fade. Balance controls the level of sound between the left and right speakers. Fade controls the level of sound between the front and rear speakers. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of the incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume. 4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Brightness and Contrast iPod® MENU button Adjust the brightness or contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen. This button can only be used for iPod® operations. See “iPod® player operation without Navigation System” later in this section for details about the function of this button. Clock Adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value. FM/AM/SAT radio operation FM·AM button: Press the FM·AM button to change the band as follows: AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM LHA2906 On-Screen Clock Select “ON” or “OFF” to control whether or not the clock is shown in the upper right corner of the display screen. RDS Display Select “ON” or “OFF” to control whether or not RDS information is displayed on the screen while the radio is playing. Language Select Select the desired language for the system. English, Spanish and French are the available languages. If another audio source is playing when the FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. XM band select: Press the XM button to change the band as follows: XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so equipped) Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 When the XM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON. *When the XM button is pressed, the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If a compact disc is playing when the XM button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning): Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right for manual tuning. SEEK tuning: or to tune Press the SEEK button from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. SCAN tuning: Press the SCAN button to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear on the screen while the radio is scan tuning. Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. Compact disc (CD) player operation 1 to 6 Station memory operations: With a CD loaded, press the CD·AUX button until the CD mode is displayed on the screen. Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3). 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the FM·AM select button, or choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using the XM button. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset number is updated on the display and the sound is briefly muted. 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete. 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. 4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. CD·AUX button: CD/MP3 display mode: While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed on the screen if the CD has been encoded with text information. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, information such as Artist, Song and Folder will be displayed. The track number and the total number of tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as well. SEEK/CAT (Reverse or Fast Forward) button: Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button or for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. SEEK/CAT button: Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT several times to skip backward sevbutton eral tracks. while a CD or Press the SEEK/CAT button MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track. several times Press the SEEK/CAT button to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only): If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a folder. RPT button: When the RPT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows: CD: 1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF CD with MP3 or WMA: 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF 1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated. 1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated. OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off. The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied. RDM button: When the RDM button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows: CD: 1 Disc Random ←→ OFF CD with MP3 or WMA: 1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF 1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be played randomly. 1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly. The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied. CD•AUX button: The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop computer. Press the CD•AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack. The CD•AUX button is also used to switch the audio system to a source plugged into the USB input jack in the center console. When a device is plugged into the AUX IN jack while another device is plugged into the USB input jack, the CD•AUX button is used to toggle between the two functions. For more information about the USB input jack, see “USB interface (models without Navigation System)” in this section. EJECT button: button is pressed with a comWhen the pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played. OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 When the button is pressed twice with a compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will reload. Additional features For more information about the iPod® player available with this system, see “iPod® player operation without Navigation System” in this section. For more information about the USB interface available with this system, see “USB interface (models without Navigation System)” in this section. For more information about the Pandora® audio feature available with this system, see “Pandora® audio” in this section. LHA2895 1. CD eject button 2. FM-AM button 3. AUX button 4. CD insert slot 4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5. Backward seek button and Forward seek button 6. BACK button 7. TUNE knob / AUDIO button 8. Display screen 9. ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control knob 10.CD button 11.SXM button* ] button is a button to launch the [ Smartphone Integration Mode. See “NissanConnect™ APP Smartphone Integration” in this section. *No satellite radio reception is available when the SXM button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so equipped) For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” in this section. Audio main operation ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control knob: Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the ON-OFF button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF button. Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume. This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45 Audio settings: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Select the “Settings” key. 3. Select the “Audio” key. Use the touchscreen to adjust the following items to the desired setting: Audio Bass Treble Balance Fade Speed Sensitive Vol. AUX Volume Level/AUX Level Adjusts the bass to the desired level. Adjusts the treble to the desired level. Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers. Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed. Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Available options are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud). Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO control knob and turning it to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear. 4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SXM settings: SXM band select: To view the SXM settings: Pressing the SXM button will change the band as follows: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Select the “Settings” key. 3. Select the “SXM” key. The signal strength, activation status and other information are displayed on the screen. FM/AM/SAT radio operation FM·AM button: Press the FM·AM button to change the band as follows: AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM If another audio source is playing when the FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing. The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. SXM1* → SXM2* → SXM1* (satellite, if so equipped) When the SXM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the last station played. The last station played will also come on when the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn the radio on. *When the SXM button is pressed, the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If a compact disc is playing when the SXM button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. While the radio is in SXM mode, the operation can be controlled through the touchscreen. Touch the “Channels” key to display a list of channels. Touch a channel displayed on the list to change to that channel. Touch the “Categories” key to display a list of categories. Touch a category displayed on the list to display options within that category. Tuning with the touchscreen: When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned using the touchscreen. To bring up the visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar running from low frequencies on the left to high frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the location of the frequency you wish to tune and the station will change to that frequency. To return to the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK” key. Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob: The radio can also be manually tuned using the TUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lower frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies. When in SXM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change the channel. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47 SEEK tuning: 3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete. When in FM or AM mode, press the seek or to tune from low to high buttons or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station. When in buttons SXM or 4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner. If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. mode, press the seek to change the category. Presets can also be selected by touching the desired preset number on the screen. Compact disc (CD) player operation LHA2899 1 to 6 Station memory operations: Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve stations can be set for the SXM band (6 for SXM1, 6 for SXM2). 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the FM·AM select button or choose the radio band SXM1, SXM2 using the SXM button. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual or seek tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard. 4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems If the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. CD button: When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play. CD/MP3 display mode Menu item CD/MP3 display mode Random/Mix Repeat Browse While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is being used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist, album and song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing: Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Random” or alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel Random/Mix mode, touch the “Random” or “Mix” key until the key is no longer highlighted. Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat” alternates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the display. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for selecting a song with the touchscreen to choose a folder. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49 SEEK (Reverse or Fast Forward) buttons: or Press and hold the seek buttons for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. SEEK buttons: Press the seek button while a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the seek several times to skip backward sevbutton eral tracks. while a CD or Press the seek button MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track. several times to skip Press the seek button forward several tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is played. If the last track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. AUX button: The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack. EJECT button: button is pressed with a comWhen the pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played. If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds, the disc will reload. Additional features For more information about the iPod® player available with this system, see “iPod® player operation with Navigation System” in this section. For more information about the USB interface available with this system, see “USB interface (models with Navigation System)” in this section. For more information about the Bluetooth® audio interface available with this system, see “Bluetooth® streaming audio with Navigation System” in this section. 4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2577 USB INTERFACE (models without Navigation System) (if so equipped) Connecting a device to the USB input jack WARNING Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. CAUTION ● Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. ● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover. ● Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. The USB input jack is located in the center con1 . sole. Insert the USB device into the jack 䊊 When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle’s audio system. SEEK/CAT buttons: Audio file operation CD-AUX button: Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the CD-AUX button to switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is playing or another audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN jack, the CD-AUX button toggles between the three sources. Play information: Information about the audio files being played can be displayed on the display screen of the vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the audio files are encoded, information such as Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed. The track number and number of total tracks in the folder are displayed on the screen as well. Press the SEEK/CAT button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the several times to skip SEEK/CAT button backward several tracks. while an auPress the SEEK/CAT button dio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button several times to skip forward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. RDM button: When the RDM button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows: SEEK/CAT (Reverse or All Random → 1 Folder Random → OFF Fast Forward) buttons: All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be played randomly. Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the audio file returns to normal play speed. 1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly. OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51 The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied. CAUTION ● Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. RPT button: When the RPT button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows: ● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover. 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → OFF 1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated. 1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be repeated. OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off. The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied. LHA2577 USB INTERFACE (models with Navigation System) Connecting a device to the USB input jack TUNE/SCROLL knob: If there are multiple folders with audio files on the USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio files on the USB device, turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will return to the first track on the USB device. WARNING Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. 4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. The USB input jack is located in the center con1 . sole. Insert the USB device into the jack 䊊 When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle’s audio system. Audio file operation Press the button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track. button several times to skip forPress the ward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played. AUX button: Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the AUX button to switch to the USB input mode. If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted, press the AUX button until the center display changes to the USB memory mode. Random and repeat play mode: While files on a USB device are playing, the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played randomly. If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL control knob to restart the USB memory. LHA1496 Play information: Information about the audio files being played is shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the name of a song on the screen to begin playing that song. Seeking buttons: Press the button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning button sevof the current track. Press the eral times to skip backward several tracks. Random: Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the USB device. When the random icon is displayed to the mode is active, the left of the song title or album name to denote which random pattern is applied. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until icon is displayed. no Repeat: Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the USB device. When the repeat icon is displayed to the mode is active, the left of the song title or album name to denote which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat icon mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no is displayed. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53 CAUTION ● Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. ● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover. LHA2577 iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) Connecting iPod® WARNING Do not connect/disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. ● Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the iPod® can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB jack 1 . Connect the located in the center console 䊊 iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. 4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod®. * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Compatibility The following models are compatible: ● iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version 1.3 or later) ● iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version 1.1.2PC or later) ● iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version 2.0.1PC or later) ● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later) ● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later) ● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3PC or later) ● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0PC or later) ● iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.0.2PC or later) ● iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB) (firmware version 1.0.1PC or later) ● iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.2PC or later) ● iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firmware version 1.1PC or later) ● iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware version 2.2.1 or later) ● iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware version 2.2.1 or later) ● iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware version 3.1.3 or later) ● iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware version 4.3.5 or later) ● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later) ● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or later) ● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later) ● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later) ● iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later) ● iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later) Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above. Audio main operation ● Songs Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position. Then, press the CD·AUX or iPod® MENU button repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode. ● Podcasts If the audio system is turned off while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® plays when the audio system is turned back on. ● Audiobooks If the audio system is off, pressing the CD·AUX or iPod® MENU button turns the audio system on and plays the iPod®. If the audio system is on, the audio system automatically begins playing tracks from the iPod® when it is plugged into the jack. iPod® MENU button: Press the iPod® MENU button while the iPod® is connected to show the iPod® operation menu on the audio display. Scroll through the menu list using the TUNE·SCROLL control dial. Press ENTER to select a menu item. Items in the iPod® menu appear on the display in the following order: ● Now playing ● Playlists ● Artists ● Albums ● Genres ● Composers ● Shuffle songs For more information about each item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual. SEEK/CAT buttons: or Press the SEEK/CAT buttons skip backward or forward one track. to Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the track returns to normal play speed. REPEAT (RPT): When the RPT button is pressed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: Repeat Off → 1 Track Repeat → All Repeat → Repeat Off Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55 1 Track Repeat: the current track will be repeated. CAUTION ● Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. All Repeat: all songs in the current list are repeated. Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is applied. RANDOM (RDM): When the RDM button is pressed while a track is being played, the play pattern can be changed as follows: ● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover. Shuffle Off → Track Shuffle → Album Shuffle → Shuffle Off Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list will be played randomly. Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list will be played randomly. Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is applied. BACK button: When the BACK button is pressed, it returns to the previous menu. LHA2577 iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) Connecting iPod® WARNING Do not connect/disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. 4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port. Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device. To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the iPod® can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB jack 1 . Connect the located in the center console 䊊 iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls. ● iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later) To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod®. ● iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later) * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ● iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later) Compatibility ● iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later) The following models are compatible: ● iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware version 1.3.0 or later) ● iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later) ● iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later) ● iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later) LHA1494 ● iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware version 2.0.1 or later) ● iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later) Audio main operation ● iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later) ● iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware version 2.0.4 or later) * Some features of this iPod® may not be fully functional. Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode. ● iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)* Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above. If the system has been turned off while the iPod® was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the iPod®. ● iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware version 5.1 or later) ● iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware version 5.1 or later) ● iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later) Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57 AUX button: ● Artists When the AUX button is pressed with the system off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod® is connected, press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod® mode. ● Albums ● Genres ● Songs ● Composers ● Audiobooks ● Podcasts Random and repeat play mode: LHA2907 Interface: The interface for iPod® operation shown on the vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to the iPod® interface. Use the touchscreen, BACK button or the scrolling knob to navigate the menus on the screen. When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key to bring up the iPod® interface. Depending on the iPod® model, the following items may be available on the menu list screen. For further information about each item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual. ● Playlists 4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated or played randomly. Random: Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the iPod®. When the random mode is icon is displayed to the left of active, the the song title or album name to denote which random pattern is applied. To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random” key until no icon is displayed. Repeat: Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat mode is icon is displayed to the left of active, the the song title or album name to denote which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat icon mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no is displayed. BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle’s speakers. Seek buttons: or Press the seek button backward or forward one track. to skip or Press and hold the seek button for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the track returns to normal play speed. LHA2279 Scrolling menus: While navigating long lists of artists, albums or songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll the list by the first character in the name. To activate character indexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the TUNE knob to choose the number or letter to jump to in the list and then press the ENTER button. If no character is selected after two seconds, the display returns to normal. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59 Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press the AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the screen. The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are displayed on the screen. PANDORA® AUDIO (United States only) (if so equipped) LHA2773 LHA2844 Connecting Bluetooth® audio 4. Select the “Connect New Device” key. To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the vehicle, follow the procedure below: 5. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset. The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones. 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Select the “Settings” key. 3. Select the “Phone & Bluetooth” key. 4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The vehicle’s audio system is capable of playing audio streaming through a compatible, USBconnected audio device using the Pandora® music service. Connecting a device for use with Pandora® audio Devices capable of streaming Pandora® audio can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system via the USB input jack. The USB input jack is located on the center console beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Launch the Pandora® application on the phone and then connect with the USB jack. Once connected, the Pandora® controls will be displayed on the control panel display screen. Compatibility NOTE: The following iPhone® models are compatible with the system: There is a limit of six skips per station per hour. If a “ ” (thumbs down) is given after the skip limit has been reached, the current track will continue to play but the feedback will be saved. ● iPhone® 3GS ● iPhone® 4 ● iPhone® 4S ● iPhone® 5 The latest Pandora® application should be installed on the phone. LHA2283 Models without Navigation System Audio main operation Models without Navigation System: To switch to the Pandora® audio mode, press the CD-AUX button repeatedly until the Pandora® audio mode is displayed on the screen. The controls for the Pandora® audio are displayed on the screen. Press the audio preset 3 button to pause or play the music. ” Press the audio preset 5 button to select “ (thumbs up). Press the audio preset 4 button to ” (thumbs down). select “ Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61 ● A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. LHA0049 CD CARE AND CLEANING ● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. ● Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. ● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. ● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. 4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA2559 1. 2. 3. Volume control switch MODE select switch Tuning switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a different function than a tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds. The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel. AM and FM: CD: ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number. MODE select switch ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station. ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number (if playing compressed audio files). Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the following sequence: ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station. ● Press the ENTER button to show the CD Menu. AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 (satellite radio, if so equipped) → XM2 (satellite radio, if so equipped) → XM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped) → CD* → USB/iPod®* (if so equipped) → Bluetooth® Audio* → AUX* → AM. ● Press the ENTER button to show the list of preset stations. * These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device or connected to the system. Volume control switch Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume. Tuning switch While the display is showing a map or audio screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or downward to select a station, track, CD or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the switch XM (if so equipped): USB (if so equipped): ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number. ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station. ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number. ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to go to the next or previous category. ● Press the ENTER button to show the USB Menu. ● Press the ENTER button to show the XM Menu. iPod® (if so equipped): ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number. Bluetooth® Audio: ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the next song. ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the current song. ● Press the ENTER button to show the iPod Menu. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63 NISSANCONNECT™ APP SMARTPHONE INTEGRATION (if so equipped) Pandora® Audio (if so equipped): ● Tilt up for less than 1.5 seconds to input “thumbs up” for the current song. ● Tilt down for less than 1.5 seconds to input “thumbs down” for the current song. ● Tilt up for more than 1.5 seconds to skip to the next song (if the maximum of six skips per station per hour has not been exceeded). This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone Integration technology. This allows many compatible Smartphone applications to be displayed and easily controlled through the vehicle’s touchscreen. NOTE: ANTENNA A compatible smartphone and registration is required to use mobile applications or to access connected features of certain vehicle applications. The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be removed. When you need to remove the antenna, turn the antenna rod counterclockwise. REGISTERING WITH NISSANCONNECT™ APP To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod clockwise and hand tighten. To use the Smartphone Integration feature, it is necessary for the user to register. In order to register, visit the NissanConnect™ website, www.nissanusa.com/connect/ and sign up or create an account through the prompts on the NissanConnect™ App. Once registered, download the NissanConnect™ App from your compatible phone’s application download source and then log into the application. If you already have an account created through the App, please log in. CAUTION ● Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation. ● Be sure that the antenna is removed before the vehicle enters an automatic car wash. ● Be sure to fold down the antenna before the vehicle enters a garage with a low ceiling. 4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CONNECT PHONE To use this feature, a compatible smartphone must be connected via Bluetooth® or USB to the vehicle. For more information on connecting your phone, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. NOTE: For Apple iPhones, NissanConnect™ Apps REQUIRES the phone to be plugged in via USB. NOTE: For Android phones, NissanConnect™ Apps REQUIRES the phone to be paired via Bluetooth. CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO APPLICATION DOWNLOAD Once connected, the NissanConnect™ App will search your phone to determine which compatible applications are currently installed. The user will then choose which apps they want to bring into their vehicle from the list of apps within the “Manage My Apps” section of the NissanConnect™ App on their smartphone. The vehicle will then download the in-vehicle interface for each of these compatible applications. Once downloaded, the user can access their selected smartphone applications through the vehicle touchscreen. For more information on application availability see www.nissanusa.com/connect/ When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts. WARNING ● A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving. ● If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. CAUTION ● Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules. ● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. ● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. ● Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. ● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. ● If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65 BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. WARNING ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. ● If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. NOTE: CAUTION Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatically to the system, consult the phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on device operation. To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. LHA2897 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can 4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. ● Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system. ● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized or work properly. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions. ● You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions: – Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area. – Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area. – Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed. ● When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call. ● Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. ● While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones. ● If the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” in this section. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help. ● Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. ● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc. REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. IC Regulatory information – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. – This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations. BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon. – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67 USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone System. If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, button is which takes a few seconds. If the pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce “Hands-free phone system not ready” and will not react to voice commands. Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe the following: ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly. ● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly. ● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds. ● Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words. Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press button located on the and release the steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a command. The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted. ● If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say “Help” and the system will repeat them. ● If a command is not recognized, the system announces, “Command not recognized. Please try again.” Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice. ● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a response. 4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can button on the also press and hold the steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system. ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, press the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob. ● In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by button on the steering pressing the wheel. ● To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, button and after the tone press the say, “Call Redial.” How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following rules and examples. ● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. Example: 1-800-662-6200 – “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”, or – “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh” ● Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only. Example: 1-800-662-6200 – “One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh”, The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. – “six two zero zero” ● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (available when using the “Special Number” command and the “Send” command during a call). See “List of voice commands” and “Special number” in this section for more information. Example: 1-555-1212 *123 – “One five five five one two one two star one two three” – NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred,” and ● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using the “Special Number” command). – NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred” ● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available only when storing a phone book number). ● Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The system will prompt you to continue entering digits, if desired. Example: 1-800-662-6200 – “One eight zero zero” The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more. Voice Prompt Interrupt In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing button on the steering wheel. After the interrupting the system, wait for a beep before speaking your command. One Shot Call To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, press button and after the tone say, “Call the Redial”. NOTE: For best results, say phone numbers as single digits. The voice command “Help” is available at any time. Please use the “Help” command to get information on how to use the system. – “six six two” Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69 LHA2561 CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel. PHONE/SEND Press the button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call. You can also use the button to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once. See “List of voice commands” and “During a call” in this section for more information. PHONE/END While the Voice Recognition system is active, press and hold the button for 5 seconds to quit the Voice Recognition system at any time. 2. The system announces: “Press the ) button for the PHONE/SEND ( hands-free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END ) button to select a different lan( guage.” ENTER button / tuning switch While using the Voice Recognition system, tilt the tuning switch up or down to manually control the phone system. Press the ENTER button to select an option on the display screen. 3. Press the GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For additional command options, refer to “List of voice commands” in this section. You can interact with the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System using English, Spanish or French. To change the language, perform the following. 4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems For information on voice adaptation, see “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section. 4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in French). To select the current language, ) button. To press the PHONE/SEND ( select a different language, tilt the tuning switch ( or ) up or down. NOTE: Choosing a language 1. Press and hold the than 5 seconds. button. button for more You must press the button within 5 seconds to change the language. 5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After 5 seconds, the VR session will end, and the language will not be changed. Connecting procedure tions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones. NOTE: When prompted for a Passkey code, enter “1234” from the handset. The Passkey code “1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed. The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled. Main Menu A “Connect phone” 䊊 B “Add phone” 䊊 C Initiate from handset 䊊 D Name phone 䊊 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. The system announces the available commands. A . The system ac2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊 knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands. B . The system acknowl3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊 edges the command and asks you to initiate C. connecting from the phone handset 䊊 The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc- A . The system acknowledges 2. Say: “Call” 䊊 the command and announces the next set of available commands. B . The system ac3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊 knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands. 4. The system asks you to say a name for the D. phone 䊊 Say: “Special Number” to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters. If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. 4. Say the number you wish to call starting with C . If the the area code in single digit format 䊊 system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number, try entering the number in the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five” as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, say “Special Number”. See “How to say numbers” in this section for more information. Also, if more than one phone is connected and the name sounds too much like a name already used, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu A “Call” 䊊 B “Phone Number” 䊊 5. When you have finished speaking the phone number, the system repeats it back and announces the available commands. D “Dial” 䊊 D . The system acknowledges 6. Say: “Dial” 䊊 the command and makes the call. C Speak the digits 䊊 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. A tone will sound. For additional command options, see “List of voice commands” in this section. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71 Remember to wait for the tone before speaking. Receiving a call When you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel. button After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response. If you do not wish to take the call when you button hear the ring tone, press the on the steering wheel. If you want to end an action without completing it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the system is waiting for a response. The system will end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system. Once the call has ended, press the on the steering wheel. NOTE: For additional command options, see “List of voice commands” later in this section. LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu “Call” “Phonebook” “Recent Calls” “Connect Phone” “Help” button on When you press and release the the steering wheel, you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu. The following pages describe these commands and the commands in each sub-menu. If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a response. A (Speak name) 䊊 If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you can dial a number associated with a name. See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to store entries. When prompted by the system, say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call. The system acknowledges the name. If there are multiple numbers associated with the name, the system asks you to choose the correct number. Once you have confirmed the name and location, the system begins the call. B (Speak Digits) 䊊 “Call” Main Menu “Call” A (Speak name) 䊊 “Phone Number” B (Speak Digits) 䊊 C “Special Number” 䊊 D “Redial” 䊊 E “Call Back” 䊊 4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems When prompted by the system, say the number you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers” and “Making a call by entering a phone number” in this section for more details. C “Special Number” 䊊 For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, say “Special Number”. When the system acknowledges the command, the system will prompt you to speak the number. D “Redial” 䊊 Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed. The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing. If a redial number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to redial” and ends the VR session. E “Call Back” 䊊 Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle. The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing. If a call back number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to call back” and ends the VR session. During a call During a call there are several command options button on the steering available. Press the wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter commands. ● “Help” — The system announces the available commands. ● “Go back/Correction” — The system announces “Go back,” ends the VR session and returns to the call. ● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces “Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns to the call. ● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system: Say: “Send one two three four.” The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers. The system then ends the VR session and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”, Say “pound” for “#”. ● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call command to transfer the call from the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired. The system announces, “Transfer call. Call transferred to privacy mode.” The system then ends the VR session. ● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it. Use the mute command again to unmute your voice. NOTE: If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset to “off” for the next call so the other party can hear your voice. “Phonebook” (phones without automatic phonebook download function) NOTE: The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving. Main Menu “Phonebook” A “Transfer Entry” 䊊 B “Delete Entry” 䊊 C “List Names” 䊊 To reconnect the call from the cellular phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free System, button. press the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73 For phones that do not support automatic download of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the “Phonebook” command is used to manually add entries to the vehicle phonebook. The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each phone connected to the system. NOTE: Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with Phone B. A “Transfer Entry” 䊊 Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system. When prompted by the system, say the name you would like to give the new entry. For example, say: “Mary.” If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. Also, if the name sounds too much like a name already stored, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again. The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory. Enter a phone number by voice command: For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” See “How to say numbers” in this section for more information. To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone’s memory: Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset. The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® communication link. The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones. The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose “Store.” ognizes the command, speak the name to delete or say “List Names” to choose an entry. C “List Names” 䊊 Use the List Names command to hear all the names in the phonebook. The system recites the phonebook entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu. You can stop the playback of the list at any time button on the steering by pressing the wheel. The system ends the VR session. “Phonebook” (phones with automatic phonebook download function) NOTE: The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving. Main Menu “Phonebook” The system confirms the name, location and number. Say a Name B “Delete Entry” 䊊 B “Record Name” 䊊 Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook. After the system rec- 4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems A “List Names” 䊊 For phones that support automatic download of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the “Phonebook” command is used to manage entries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry. The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for each phone connected to the system. When a phone is connected to the system, the phonebook is automatically downloaded to the vehicle. This feature allows you to access your phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call contacts by name. You can record a custom voice tag for contact names that the system has difficulty recognizing. For more information see “Record name” in this section. NOTE: When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu. You can stop the playback of the list at any time button on the steering by pressing the wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the “Record name” command in this section for information about recording custom voice tags for list entries that the system has difficulty pronouncing. B “Record Name” 䊊 The system allows you to record custom voice tags for contact names in the phonebook that the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can also be used to record voice tags to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the system. “Recent Calls” Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with Phone B. “List Names” 䊊 A Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book. The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. Use the Recent Calls command to access outgoing, incoming or missed calls or dial numbers for the last incoming or outgoing calls. A “Outgoing” 䊊 Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing calls made from the vehicle. B “Incoming” 䊊 Use the Incoming command to list the incoming calls made to the vehicle. C “Missed” 䊊 Use the Missed command to list the calls made to the vehicle that were not answered. D “Call Back” 䊊 Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call to the vehicle. E “Redial” 䊊 Main Menu “Recent Calls” A “Outgoing” 䊊 Use the Redial command to dial the number of the last outgoing call from the vehicle. B “Incoming” 䊊 C “Missed” 䊊 D “Call Back” 䊊 E “Redial” 䊊 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75 “Connect Phone” NOTE: The Add Phone command is not available when the vehicle is moving. Main Menu “Connect Phone” A “Add Phone” 䊊 B “Select Phone” 䊊 C “Delete Phone” 䊊 D “Replace Phone” 䊊 E “Bluetooth OFF” 䊊 Use the Connect Phone commands to manage the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle. A “Add Phone” 䊊 Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this section for more information. B “Select Phone” 䊊 Use the Select Phone command to select from a list of phones connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to select. Only one phone can be active at a time. C “Delete Phone” 䊊 Use the Delete Phone command to delete a phone that is connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also delete that phonebook for that phone. D “Replace Phone” 䊊 Use the Replace Phone command to replace an existing phone pairing with a new phone. The system will keep all voice tags assigned to your phonebook. E “Bluetooth OFF” 䊊 Use the Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a wireless connection to your phone. VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE Voice Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different voice adaptation model for each connected phone. 4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows. 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location. 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine running, the parking brake on, and the transmission in P (Park). 3. Press and hold the than 5 seconds. button for more 4. The system announces: “Press the ) button for the PHONE/SEND ( hands-free phone system to enter the voice adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END ) button to select a different lan( guage.” 5. Press the button. For information on selecting a different language, see “Choosing a language” in this section. 6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory locations are already in use, the system will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow the instructions provided by the system. 7. When preparation is complete and you are button. ready to begin, press the ● transfer entry ● dial eight three zero five one ● eight pause nine three two pause seven ● record name 8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions provided by the system. ● delete all entries ● four three pause two nine pause zero 9. When training is finished, the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded. ● call seven two four zero nine ● delete redial number ● phonebook delete entry ● phonebook list names ● next entry ● call eight oh five four one ● dial star two one seven oh ● correction ● yes ● connect phone 10. The system will announce that voice adaptation has been completed and the system is ready. The VA mode will stop if: button is pressed for more than ● The 5 seconds in VA mode. ● The vehicle begins moving during VA mode. ● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position. ● dial seven four oh one eight ● no ● previous entry ● select ● delete ● missed ● dial eight five six nine two ● Bluetooth on ● outgoing During the VA mode, the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases. (The system will prompt you for each phrase.) ● call three one nine oh two ● dial three oh four two nine ● delete call back number ● incoming ● call seven six three oh one ● go back Training phrases ● phonebook transfer entry ● dial nine seven two six six ● nine seven pause pause three oh eight ● call five six two eight zero ● dial six six four three seven ● cancel ● call back number ● call star two zero nine five ● delete phone Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77 MANUAL CONTROL While using the Voice Recognition system, it is possible to select menu options by using the steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice commands. The manual control mode does not allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition, exit the manual control mode by pressing and ) button. At that holding the PHONE/END ( ) button time, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( will start the Hands- Free Phone System. ● To go back to the previous menu, press the ) button. If the current PHONE/END ( menu is the Main Menu, pressing the ) button will exit the PHONE/END ( Phone system. ● To exit the manual control mode, press and ) button for hold the PHONE/END ( 5 seconds. Operating tips ● To enter manual control mode, start the Voice Recognition system and tilt the tuning ) switch up or down. The system will ( speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙ when manual controls are initially activated. ● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning ) switch up or down. The system will ( always speak the current menu option. Depending on the audio display, it will also show the current menu option. ● To select the current menu option, press the ) button. PHONE/SEND ( 4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved. Symptom System fails to interpret the command correctly. The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book. Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section. 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section. 1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79 BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped) make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. WARNING ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. ● If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine. NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands, so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible. For more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section. Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. LHA2897 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can 4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system. ● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting. ● Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. ● You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions: ● While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones. – Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area. – Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area. – Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed. ● When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call. ● Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time. ● If the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” in this section. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help. ● Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise. ● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc. ● The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones. REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations. – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. IC Regulatory information – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. – This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81 5. Initiate the connecting process from the handset. The system will display the message: “Is PIN XXXXXX displayed on your Bluetooth device?”. If the PIN is displayed on your Bluetooth® device, select “Yes” to complete the pairing process. BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Bosch. For more information, see the Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual. VOICE COMMANDS VEHICLE PHONEBOOK You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section. Voice Prompt Interrupt While using the voice recognition system, the system voice can be interrupted to allow the user to speak commands. While the system is speakbutton on the steering ing, press the wheel. The system voice will stop and a tone will be heard. After the tone, speak desired command (displayed on the touchscreen). One Shot Call To use the system faster, you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu. For example, press button and after the tone say, “Call the Redial”. To access the vehicle phonebook: 1. Press the LHA2773 button on the control panel. 2. Select the “Phonebook” key. CONNECTING PROCEDURE 3. Choose the desired entry from the displayed list. NOTE: 4. The number of the entry will be displayed on the screen. Touch the number to initiate dialing. The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled. 1. Press the [ panel. ] button on the control 2. Select the “Settings” key. 3. Select the “Phone & Bluetooth” key. 4. Select the “Connect New Device” key. 4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: To scroll quickly through the list, touch the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of the screen. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to choose a letter or number and then press ENTER. The list will move to the first entry that begins with that number or letter. MAKING A CALL To make a call, follow the procedure below: 1. Press the button on the control panel. The “Phone” screen will appear on the display. 2. Select one of the following options to make a call: ● “Phonebook”: Select the name from an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook. ● “Call Lists”: Select the name from the incoming, outgoing or missed. ● “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from the vehicle. ”: Input the phone number manually ● “ using a keypad displayed on the screen. For information on how to use the touch screen, see “How to use the touch screen” in this section. RECEIVING A CALL When a call is placed to the connected phone, the display will change to phone mode. To accept the incoming call, either: ● Press the wheel, or button on the steering ● Touch the icon on the screen. To reject the incoming call, either: button on the steering ● Press the wheel, or ● Touch the red phone icon on the screen. DURING A CALL While a call is active, the following options are available on the screen: ● “Handset” Select this option to switch control of the phone call over to the handset. ● “Mute Mic.” Select this option to mute the microphone. Select again to unmute the microphone. ) icon ● Red phone ( Select to end the phone call. ENDING A CALL TEXT MESSAGING WARNING ● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. ● Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check local regulations before using this feature. ● Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. ● If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. The system allows for the sending and receiving of text messages through the vehicle interface. To end a phone call, select the red phone ( ) icon on the screen or press the button on the steering wheel. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83 Sending a text message: 1. Press the wheel. button on the steering ● “On my way” text message screen. Press the button to access the following options for replying to the text message: ● “Running late” ● “Okay” ● Call Back Speak this command to call the sender of the text message using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. 2. Say “Phone” after the tone. ● “Yes” 3. Say “Send Text” after the tone. ● “No” 4. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the following: ● “Where are you?” ● To (a name) ● Enter Number ● Missed Calls ● Incoming Calls ● Outgoing Calls For more information about these options, see “Voice commands” in this section. 5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system prompts for which message to send. Nine predefined messages are available as well as three custom messages. To choose one of the predefined messages, speak one of the following after the tone: ● “Driving, can’t text” ● “Call me” ● “When?” To send one of the custom messages, say “Custom Messages”. If more than one custom message is stored, the system will prompt for the number of the desired custom message. For more information on setting and managing custom text messages, see “Bluetooth® settings” in this section. Reading a received text message: 1. Press the wheel. button on the steering 2. Say “Phone” after the tone. 3. Say “Read Text” after the tone. The text message, sender and delivery time are shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to scroll through all text messages if more than one button to exit the are available. Press the 4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ● Send Text Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message. ● Read Text Speak this command to read the text message again. ● Previous Text Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available). ● Next Text Speak this command to move to the next text message (if available). NOTE: Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS To access the phone settings: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Select the “Settings” key. 3. Select the “Phone & Bluetooth” key. LHA2844 Menu Item Phone Settings Connect New Device Select Connected Device Replace Connected Device Delete Connected Device Bluetooth Result See “Phone settings” in this section for more information. Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85 NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (if so equipped) PHONE SETTINGS To access the phone settings: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Select the “Settings” key. 3. Select the “Phone & Bluetooth” key. 4. Select the “Phone Settings” key and adjust the following settings as desired: ● Sort Phonebook By: Select “First Name” or “Last Name” to choose how phonebook entries are alphabetically displayed on the screen. ● Use Phonebook From: Select “Handset” to use the phone’s phonebook. Select “SIM” to use the phonebook on the SIM card. Select “Both” to use both sources. ● Text Messaging: Select to toggle the text message functionality on or off. ● Show Incoming Text: Select to toggle text notification on or off. ● Auto Reply: Select to toggle auto reply functionality on or off. ● Auto Reply Message: Select to choose a message that is sent when the auto reply function is activated. ● Use Vehicle’s Signature: Select to toggle on or off the addition of the vehicle signature to outgoing messages. ● Custom Text Messages: Select the predefined messages that are used by the system. ● Download Phonebook Now: Select to download the phonebook to the vehicle from the chosen source. ● Record Name for Phonebook Entry: Select to record a name for a phonebook entry for use with the NISSAN Voice Recognition System. 4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the systems equipped on this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation systems. To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press button located on the steering wheel. the When prompted, speak the command for the system you wish to activate. The command given is picked up by the microphone and performed when it is properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recognition will provide a voice response as well as a message in the center display to inform you of the command results. USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If button is pressed before the initializathe tion completes, the system will announce: “Voice Recognition System not ready. Please wait.” 4. Voice and display feedback are provided when the command is accepted. ● If the command is not recognized, the system announces: “Command not recognized”. Repeat the command in a clear voice. ● If you want to cancel the command or go back to the previous menu of commands, button. The system will anpress the nounce: “Cancelling voice recognition” or “Go back” depending on the current menu level. LHA2589 Giving voice commands 1. Press the button. 2. The system announces: “Please say a category like phone or a command like points of interest followed by a brand name”. A list of available commands is then spoken by the system. 3. After the tone sounds and the face icon on the display changes, speak a command. Available commands are discussed later in this section. button to move back ● Press the through the menus displayed on the screen. ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, use the volume control switches on the steering wheel or the volume knob on the control panel. Operating tips To get the best performance out of NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the following: ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly. ● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly. ● Start speaking a command within 3.5 seconds after the tone sounds. ● Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words. ● The voice command screen can also be accessed using the control panel display: 1. Press the [ ] button. 2. Select the “Voice Commands” key. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87 How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following examples. General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. Phone numbers Speak phone numbers according to the following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say dial number and then speak the phone number in any of the following formats: LHA2780 SYSTEM FEATURES NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the following systems: ● Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ● Navigation ● Audio ● “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh” ● “one eight hundred six six two six two oh oh” ● “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh” For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits. Also, full numbers can only be spoken for “800”. For example, you cannot say 555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”. ● Information ● My Apps For additional information on the navigation system, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. 4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System voice commands: 1. Press the button. 2. Say “Call” and then a name in the vehicle phonebook to call that entry. Otherwise, say “Phone” to access various phone commands. If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the system announces: “Bluetooth® is off. Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?” If no phone is connected to the system and the vehicle is stationary, the system announces: “There is no phone connected. Would you like to connect a phone now?” Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All further Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System voice commands are only available if a phone is connected. If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is set to “On”, the following voice commands are available: ● Call (a name) Speak the name of the contact in which you are trying to call. System will confirm correct contact. Say “Dial” to initiate dialing. ● Dial Number Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed. After the number is entered, say “Dial” to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” to correct the number entered. Say “Go Back” to return to the main menu. ● List Phonebook Starting with the first alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, the system prompts for an additional command. Say “Dial” to call the number of the phonebook entry. Say “Send Text” to send a text message to the number of the phonebook entry. Say “Next Entry” to skip to the next alphabetical entry in the vehicle phonebook, where the same options will then be available. ● Recent Calls The system prompts for an additional command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display a list of such calls on the screen. ● Read Text Reads an incoming text message. For more information about text messaging with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands are available for the Navigation System: ● Street Address (address) ● Points of Interest (name) ● Send Text Sends a text message. For more information about text messaging with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. ● Select Phone ● POI by Category ● Home ● Address Book ● Previous Destinations ● Enter Address in Steps The system replies “Please use manual controls to continue”. Use manual controls to change the active phone from among the listed phones connected to the vehicle. For more information about the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section. ● Cancel Route For more information about these commands, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. Speak the number of the entry displayed on the screen to dial that number or say “Next Page” to view entries on the next page (if available). ● Redial Redials the last called number. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89 AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS To access the audio system voice commands: 1. Press the button. 2. Say “Audio” 3. Speak a command from the following available commands: ● Play (AM, FM, etc.) Allows user to select radio band ● Tune AM (number) Allows user to tune directly to a desired AM frequency ● Tune FM (number) Allows user to tune directly to a desired FM frequency ● SXM channel (number) Allows user to tune directly to a desired SXM station (if so equipped) ● CD Track (number) Allows user to select track to be played ● Play Song (name) Allows user to select song name to be played ● Play Artist (name) Allows user to select artist to be played ● Play Album (name) Allows user to select album name to be played For more information about the audio system, see “Audio system” in this section. INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands are available for the information functions of the Navigation System: For more information about these commands, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual. MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS Many Apps can be accessed using this voice command. See “NissanConnect™ App Smartphone Integration” in this section for more information. HELP VOICE COMMANDS The following voice commands can be spoken to have the system provide instructions and tips for using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. ● List Commands ● What Can I Say? ● General Help ● Traffic ● Quit ● Fuel Prices ● Exit ● Stocks ● Movie Listings ● Current Weather ● Weather Map ● 5 — day Forecast ● 6 — hour Forecast 4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved. Symptom/error message The system responds “Command Not Recognized” or the system fails to recognize the command correctly. Solution 1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help” menu. 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. 4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Using four wheel drive (4WD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Hill start assist system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Rear sonar system (RSS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING ● Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) WARNING ● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death. 5-2 Starting and driving ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. ● Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions: 1. Open all the windows. air recirculation but2. Set the ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air. ● If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. ● The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle. ● If a special body, camper, or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. Do not occupy these areas while the engine is running even if the vehicle is parked. Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. may also generate carbon monoxide. THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants. WARNING ● The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. ● Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. CAUTION ● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants. ● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer. ● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. ● Do not race the engine while warming it up. ● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon Starting and driving 5-3 subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Additional information: ● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire. ● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). 5-4 Starting and driving ● The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure of your tires are adjusted. After the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. ● The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed in the odometer when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off. The low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. See “Check tire pressure warning message” in the “Instruments and controls” section. ● The CHECK TIRE PRES warning is not displayed if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction. ● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires. ● The Tire and Loading Information label (also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label) is located in the driver’s door opening. For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section. WARNING ● If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section for changing a flat tire.) ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. ● Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly. Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. Some examples are: – Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle. – If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, include interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. – If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle. Starting and driving 5-5 ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Be sure to read the driving safety precautions later in this section. AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or overthe-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt. 5-6 Starting and driving OFF-ROAD RECOVERY If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally leave the road surface, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Do not apply the brakes. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced. 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane. ● If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road. RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. WARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. ● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire. ● Do not rapidly apply the brakes. ● Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal. ● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course. 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible. 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle. 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition. Starting and driving 5-7 DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle. Remember that two-wheel drive models are less capable than four-wheel drive models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like. Please observe the following precautions: WARNING ● Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain. ● Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward. 5-8 Starting and driving ● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over. ● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers. ● Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle. ● To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped) and evenly distribute the load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over. ● Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could cause an accident. ● If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never back down in N (Neutral) or with the clutch depressed (manual transmission vehicles), using only the brake, as this could cause loss of control. ● Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed. Use the hill descent control feature (if so equipped). ● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim. ● Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened. ● Always drive with the floor mats in place as the floor may become hot. ● Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control. ● Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with 4WD engaged (if so equipped). ● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. ● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. ● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control. ● If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident. ● Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully. ● Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. See “Brake system” later in this section for “Wet brakes”. ● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured. ● Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. See “Periodic maintenance” in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.” Starting and driving 5-9 IGNITION SWITCH To remove the key from the ignition switch: WARNING 1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position with the ignition switch in the ON position. ● Never remove the ignition key or place the ignition switch in the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock (for models with a steering lock mechanism). This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. 2. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 3. Remove the key from the ignition. If the shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key. WSD0041 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so equipped) The ignition lock is designed so the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position and the key removed until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. If the shift lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the ignition switch cannot be moved to the LOCK position. 5-10 Starting and driving 1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position. 2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON position. 3. Turn the key to the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key. The shift lever is designed so it cannot moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch. The shift lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ON positions. The OFF position is indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the steering wheel is not locked (for models with a steering lock mechanism). KEY POSITIONS In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position. This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left. This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. If the key will not turn from the LOCK position, turn the steering wheel to the left or right while turning the key to unlock the key cylinder. LOCK: Normal parking position (0) OFF: (Not used) (1) ACC: (Accessories) (2) ON: Normal operating position (3) START: (4) WSD0052 MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so equipped) This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key. It automatically returns to the ON position. The ignition switch includes a device that helps prevent accidental removal of the key while driving. The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. On manual transmission models, to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position from the ACC or ON position, place the ignition switch in the OFF position, push the key in, then place the ignition switch in LOCK position. Starting and driving 5-11 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (if so equipped) ● Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key. ● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so equipped), and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel. If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures: 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. 5-12 Starting and driving ● Check that all windows and lights are clean. ● Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. ● Check that all doors are closed. STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Automatic transmission: Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch. ● Position seat and adjust headrests. The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions. ● Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Manual transmission: ● Fasten the seat belt and ask all passengers to do likewise. ● Check the operation of warning lights when the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See “Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. DRIVING THE VEHICLE 3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by placing the ignition switch in the START position. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. ● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. ● If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by placing the ignition in the START position. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so equipped) WARNING ● Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. ● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. ● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident. ● Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission. ● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Starting and driving 5-13 CAUTION ● Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission. ● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position. The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation. The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. Starting the vehicle 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever into a driving gear. 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion. 5-14 Starting and driving LSD0151 To move the shift lever: : Push the button while depressing the brake pedal : Push the button to shift : Shift without depressing brake pedal Shifting After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. WARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage. If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position and the key cannot be removed from the ignition switch. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, then the ignition switch can be placed in LOCK. P (Park): brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park) position. R (Reverse): 2WD: CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral): CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking Do not downshift into the 3 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 3 position. Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving. 3 (Third gear): Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous. 99 MPH (160 km/h) 4H: 93 MPH (150 km/h) 4LO: 34 MPH (55 km/h) 2 (Second gear): Use this position for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 2 position. 2WD: 62 MPH (100 km/h) 4H: 59 MPH (95 km/h) 4LO: 21 MPH (35 km/h) Starting and driving 5-15 1 (Low gear): To push the shift lock release, complete the following procedure: Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key. 2. Apply the parking brake. Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the following speeds in the 1 position. 3. Remove the shift lock release cover as shown. 4. Use a protective cloth on the tip of a small screwdriver before inserting it in the shift lock release slot and pushing down. 2WD: 37 MPH (60 km/h) 4H: LSD0141 4LO: Shift lock release 5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release. 12 MPH (20 km/h) If the battery is discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed. 6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position to unlock the steering wheel (for models with a steering lock mechanism). To move the shift lever, release the shift lock. The shift lever can be moved to N (Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position (for models with a steering lock mechanism). This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged. 7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location. 37 MPH (60 km/h) 5-16 Starting and driving If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the automatic transmission system as soon as possible. OFF: WARNING If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. For driving up and down long slopes where engine braking is necessary push the Overdrive switch once. The O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel comes on at this time. When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of Overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. The O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel comes on at this time. Accelerator downshift — in D position — For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed. LSD0142 Overdrive switch (if so equipped) Each time your vehicle is started, the transmission is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON. ON: With the engine running and the shift lever in the D (Drive) position, the transmission upshifts into Overdrive as vehicle speed increases. When driving conditions change, depress the Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the Overdrive off. This reduces fuel economy. Overdrive does not engage until the engine has reached operating temperature. Starting and driving 5-17 MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so equipped) WARNING ● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. ● Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage. CAUTION ● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. ● Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage. WSD0154 5 - speed Shifting ● Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). To change gears, or when upshifting or downshifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly. ● When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied. To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage could occur. Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed. 5-18 Starting and driving LSD0148 6 - speed To back up depress the shift lever and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely. On the 5-speed manual transmission model, you cannot shift directly from the 5th gear into R (Reverse). First shift into N (Neutral), then in to R (Reverse) after stopping the vehicle completely. If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (First), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (First). If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel drive, see “Transfer case shifting procedures” later in this section. Suggested up-shift speeds The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. ● For QR25DE two-wheel drive models: GEAR CHANGE 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th MPH (km/h) 11 (17) 15 (24) 24 (38) 35 (56) ● For VQ40DE two-wheel drive models and four-wheel drive models (2H and 4H position): GEAR CHANGE 1st to 2nd 2nd to 3rd 3rd to 4th 4th to 5th 5th to 6th MPH (km/h) 11 (17) 17 (27) 25 (40) 32 (51) 45 (72) Suggested maximum speed in each gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Allowable maximum speed in each gear: 2–wheel drive models (QR25DE engine) GEAR MPH (km/h) 1st 34 (54) 2nd 58 (94) 3rd 89 (144) 4th — 5th — 2–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine) GEAR MPH (km/h) 1st 35 (56) 2nd 60 (97) 3rd 87 (141) 4th — 5th — 4–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine) 2H/4H position GEAR 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th MPH (km/h) 33 (54) 58 (93) 84 (135) — — — 4L position GEAR 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th MPH (km/h) 12 (20) 22 (35) 32 (51) 43 (70) 55 (89) — Starting and driving 5-19 PARKING BRAKE 3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever B and lower the slightly, push the button 䊊 lever completely . WARNING ● Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out. ● Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. ● Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. ● Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident. LSD0150 A. To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up 䊊 To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. Automatic transmission models: Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. 5-20 Starting and driving CRUISE CONTROL ● The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL•RES, COAST•SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures. WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: ● When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. LSD2150 1. 2. 3. 4. ACCEL•RES switch COAST•SET switch CANCEL switch ON•OFF switch PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL ● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver. ● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. ● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. ● On winding or hilly roads. ● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). ● In very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. CAUTION On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off immediately. Failure to do so may cause engine damage. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed. ● To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. Starting and driving 5-21 BREAK-IN SCHEDULE ● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods. ● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes out. ● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light goes out. ● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the instrument panel go out. The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if: ● you depress the brake or clutch pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory. ● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed. ● you depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (automatic transmission). 5-22 Starting and driving To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. ● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. ● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch. ● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. ● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. ● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed. ● Push and release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). CAUTION During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance. ● Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 RPM. ● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. ● Avoid quick starts. ● Avoid hard braking as much as possible. ● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle. ● Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application ● Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load ● Avoid rapid starts and stops ● Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible ● Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible 2. Maintain Constant Speed 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances ● Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag ● Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops ● Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking ● Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops ● Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes ● Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency ● Select a gear range suitable to road conditions 3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds ● Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load 5. Use Cruise Control ● Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed ● Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains 6. Plan for the Shortest Route ● Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time 7. Avoid Idling ● Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions 8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads ● Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting 9. Winter Warm Up ● Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy ● Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving ● Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling Starting and driving 5-23 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool ● Keep your engine tuned up. ● Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible ● Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance. ● When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system ● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. ● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. , use 4H ● For vehicles equipped with or 4L position only when necessary. Fourwheel drive operation lowers fuel economy. ● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in “Technical and consumer information” later in this manual. 5-24 Starting and driving USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (if so equipped) WARNING ● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. ● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. CAUTION ● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption. If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads: – in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. – in the 4LO position for automatic transmission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. – in the 4LO position for manual transmission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the N position with the clutch pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. ● If the warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Starting and driving 5-25 TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING PROCEDURES The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the desired drive mode according to the driving conditions. 2WD or 4WD shift procedure: 4WD Shift Switch Position Wheels Driven 4WD shift Indicator Light Transfer 4LO position For driving on dry, paved roads (Economy drive) Rear wheels 2WD 4 wheels 4H Neutral *1 May blink 4LO 4 wheels Illuminated 5-26 Starting and driving Use Conditions For driving on rocky, sandy or snowcovered roads Neutral disengages the automatic transmission mechanical parking lock, which will allow the vehicle to roll. Do not leave the transfer shift position in Neutral.*2 For use when maximum power and traction is required (for example: on steep grades or rocky, sandy, muddy roads) 4WD Shift Procedure Move the 4WD switch. 2WD <—> 4H 4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position engaged. 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. For automatic transmission vehicles: Shift the shift lever to the (N) position with the brake pedal depressed. For manual transmission vehicles: Shift the shift lever to the (N) position with the clutch depressed. 3. For automatic transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with the brake pedal depressed. For manual transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the 4WD switch to 4LO or 4H with the clutch pedal depressed. THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT LEVER TO NEUTRAL FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION VEHICLES. FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLES YOU MUST MOVE THE SHIFT LEVER TO NEUTRAL. *3 *1: Before moving the shift lever from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position. - If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition. 1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch ⬙OFF⬙. 2. Start the engine. - Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD warning light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 3. Apply the parking brake, for automatic transmission vehicles, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to Neutral position. For manual transmission vehicles, move the shift lever to Neutral position. 4. With the brake pedal depressed on automatic transmission vehicles or with the clutch pedal depressed on manual transmission vehicles, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode. - Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from Neutral position. *2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing. *3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” later in this section. indicator light will also turn on when Starting and driving 5-27 The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the driving conditions. There are three types of drive modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle MUST be stationary, shift the shift lever to Neutral (N), and for automatic transmission vehicles depress the brake pedal or for manual transmission vehicles depress the clutch pedal. The switch must be depressed and turned when changing into or out of 4LO. WARNING ● When parking, apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and the ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P position. 5-28 Starting and driving ● The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear. If the shift lever is shifted from the (N) position to any other gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the vehicle may move unexpectedly. CAUTION ● Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving. ● The 4H position provides greater traction. Avoid excessive speed, as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures, and could damage drivetrain components. Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended ● The 4LO position provides maximum power and traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively, as the maximum speed is approximately 31 MPH (50 km/h). ● When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing. ● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD and 4H) while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears (D1 or D2) or manual transmission (1st gear or 2nd gear) for engine braking. ● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD and 4H) with the rear wheels spinning. ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise and tire wear. NISSAN recommends driving in the 2WD position under these conditions. ● The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4H and 4LO at low ambient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted. After driving for a while you can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO. When driving on rough roads, ● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. ● Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions. ● When the vehicle is stopped after making a turn, you may feel a slight jolt after the shift lever is shifted to N or P. This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a malfunction. When the vehicle is stuck, ● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. ● Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turn the switch ON while the vehicle is stationary and apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle. CAUTION ● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the vehicle back and forth between reverse and drive gears. ● When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing. ● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place stones or wooden blocks under the tires. Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire chains may be effective. CAUTION LSD0145 4WD shift switch operations ● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires will sink deep into the mud, making it difficult to free the vehicle. ● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on driving conditions. ● Avoid shifting gears with the engine running at high speeds as this may cause malfunction. ● If the 4WD shift switch is operated while making a turn, accelerating or decelerating or if the key switch is turned off while in the 4H or 4LO position, you may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal. ● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears (D1 or D2) or manual transmission (1st gear or 2nd gear) for engine braking. ● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning. ● Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system. ● Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4LO and 4H while driving. Starting and driving 5-29 ● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD indicator light goes out. CAUTION If the 4WD shift indicator light indication changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift switch is shifted to the 4H position at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD mode may be being engaged due to malfunctioning drive system. If the indicator does not return to normal and the 4WD warning light comes on, have the system checked by the nearest NISSAN dealer. LSD0147 4WD warning light 4WD shift indicator light The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the odometer display. ● The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other. When the shifting is completed, the 4WD shift indicator light will come on. 5-30 Starting and driving If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the ignition switch is ON, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD shift indicator light goes out. A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the warning light blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive fast. CAUTION Warning light The light should turn off within 1 second after turning the ignition switch to the ON position. While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator light will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch. The 4WD warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the engine is started. Comes on Blinks slowly Comes on or blinks when: There is a malfunction in the 4–wheel drive system The difference in wheel rotation is large The 4WD warning light is located in the meter. ● If the warning light comes on or blinks slowly during operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. ● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on. ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if so equipped) ● When the warning light comes on, the 2WD mode may be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especially careful when driving. If corresponding parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted. ● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption. If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads: – in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. – in the 4LO position for automatic transmission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. – in the 4LO position for manual transmission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to the N position with the clutch pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. ● If the warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. ● The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking. The E-Lock system can provide additional traction and should only be used when a vehicle has become or is becoming stuck. This system operates by electronically “locking” the two rear drive wheels together, allowing them to turn at the same speed. The system is used when it is not possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using the 4LO position (4 wheel drive vehicles). When added traction is required, activate the E-Lock system by pushing the switch ON. See “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” in the “Instruments and Controls” section. Once the system fully engages, the indicator light in the instrument panel will remain ON. When the system is activated, both rear wheels will engage, providing added traction. The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to engage the system, and the system will only engage up to approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, the system should be turned OFF and driving resumed. The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON. Starting and driving 5-31 WARNING ● Never leave the E-Lock system ON when driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels slipping and result in an accident and personal injury. After using the E-Lock system to free the vehicle, turn the system OFF. ● Use the E-Lock system only when freeing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position before using the E-Lock system. Never use the E-Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice surface. Using the E-Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected movement of the vehicle during engine braking, accelerating or turning, which may result in an accident and serious personal injury. 5-32 Starting and driving CAUTION ● After using the E-Lock system, turn the switch OFF to prevent possible damage to driveline components from extended use. ● Do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 12 MPH (20 km/h) when the system is engaged. Doing so could damage drivetrain components. ● Do not turn on the E-lock system while the tires are spinning. Doing so could damage drivetrain components. PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Manual transmission models: Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear. Automatic transmission models: Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. WSD0050 WARNING ● Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. ● Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. ● Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. ● Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. A ● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 䊊 Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. B ● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 䊊 Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. ● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO C CURB: 䊊 Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key. Starting and driving 5-33 POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at 2 wheels. If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. WARNING ● While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. ● If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly. Parking brake break-in Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance. 5-34 Starting and driving This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer. ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) WARNING ● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety. ● Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. – When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. – When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. See “Tire and Loading Information label” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. – For detailed information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces. Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles. WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances. Self-test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions. Starting and driving 5-35 ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS) SYSTEM When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving. ● ABLS system uses automatic braking to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to the wheel on the same axle with more traction. The ABLS system applies braking to the slipping wheel, which helps redirect power to the other wheel. ● On 4WD models the ABLS system operates in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode is engaged, the ABLS system operates for both drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, the ABLS system operates on the drive axle only. ● The ABLS system is always ON. In some conditions, the system may automatically turn the ABLS system off. If the system is automatically turned off, normal brake function will continue. ABLS will function even when the VDC system is turned OFF. ● The ABLS does not operate if both wheels on a drive axle are slipping. WARNING ● The ABLS system helps provide increased traction, but will not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation or by careless driving or dangerous driving practices. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces. Always drive carefully. ● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the ABLS system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the slip indicator light may illuminate. ● If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate. ● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the ABLS system may not operate properly and the slip indicator light may illuminate. 5-36 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC System helps to perform the following functions: ● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle. ● Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function). ● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO indicator light will come on and the the VDC system will be turned off. See “Using four wheel drive (4WD)” earlier in this section. ● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions: – understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input) – oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions) The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations. indiWhen the VDC system operates, the cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the following: ● The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path. ● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly. ● Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions. See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls” section. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indicator light will come on in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are off. The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC indicator illuminates to indisystem. The cate the VDC system is off. When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel. The indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC indicator will not functions are off and the flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on position. The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. WARNING ● The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully. Starting and driving 5-37 HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped) ● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling perindicator may formance, and the flash or the indicator light may illuminate. ● If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not indicaoperate properly and the tor light may illuminate. ● If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely indicator light deteriorated, the may illuminate. ● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate propindicator may flash or erly and the the indicator light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads. 5-38 Starting and driving ● When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or indicator may flash or ramp, the the indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface. ● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and indicator may flash or the the indicator light may illuminate. ● The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. WARNING ● Never rely solely on the hill descent control system to control vehicle speed when driving on steep downhill grades. Always drive carefully and attentively when using the hill descent control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. ● The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury. The hill descent control system helps maintain vehicle speed when driving under 15-21 MPH (25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill descent control is useful when engine braking alone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed. Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed allowing the driver to concentrate on steering while reducing the burden of brake and accelerator operation. HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if so equipped) ● When additional braking is required on steep downhill roads, activate the hill descent control system by pushing the switch ON. See “Hill descent control switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section. ● Once the system is activated, the indicator light will remain on in the instrument panel. See “Hill descent control system on indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls” section. If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the hill descent control system begins to function again if the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled. For the best results, when descending steep downhill grades, the hill descent control switch should be ON and the shift lever in 2 (Second gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine braking. WARNING ● Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. ● The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury. The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill. Hill start assist will operate automatically under the following conditions: ● The shift lever is shifted to a forward or reverse gear. ● The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill start assist will stop operating completely. Hill start assist will not operate when the shift lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P (Park) or on a flat and level road. ● The hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury. Starting and driving 5-39 REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so equipped) ● The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground. ● If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. WSD0103 WARNING ● Always turn and look back before backing up. The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures. ● Read and understand the limitations of the rear sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false activation. ● This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. 5-40 Starting and driving The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift lever is in R (Reverse). The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is less than 10 in (25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound continuously. If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 in (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone will sound for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the tone will sound again. The RSS automatically turns on when the shift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be ON, and the shift lever in R (Reverse). An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction in the RSS. Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect the accuracy of the RSS. COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so equipped). ANTI-FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. TIRE EQUIPMENT 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information. 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. 3. Tire chains may be used. For details see “Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual. SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: ● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. ● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. ● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. ● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE WARNING ● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. ● Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. Starting and driving 5-41 ● Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. ● Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. ● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. ● Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads. ● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped) Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting. The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower. 5-42 Starting and driving WARNING ● Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection. ● Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury. ● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury. To use the engine block heater: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord. 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet. 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts. 6 In case of emergency First aid kit (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-16 FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped) The first aid kit is located in the under-seat storage bins. To access the first aid kit: LCE0108 King cab model For King cab model, lift up the rear jump seat and remove net to remove the first aid kit. Refer to “Jump Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section earlier in the manual. 6-2 In case of emergency LCE0113 Crew cab model For Crew cab model, lift up the rear bench seat and remove the net to remove the first aid kit. Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section earlier in the manual. HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH FLAT TIRE The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving. LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash. WARNING ● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. ● Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed in the odometer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer to “Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and controls” section, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section. WARNING ● Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. ● Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on. In case of emergency 6-3 ● If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. ● Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. ● Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). CHANGING A FLAT TIRE ● Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below: ● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance. Stopping the vehicle 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle. 6-4 In case of emergency WARNING LCE0109 WCE0044 Blocking wheels 1 at both the front and Place suitable blocks 䊊 back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is 䊊 jacked up. WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury. King Cab models LCE0110 King Cab models Getting the spare tire and tools For King Cab models: The tool storage compartment is located between the two rear jump seats. 1. Turn the knob from the lock to the unlock position and remove the lid from the tool storage compartment. 2. Release the strap to remove the tool bag. 3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the storage location. 4. Remove the jack and jacking tools. In case of emergency 6-5 2. Find the oval-shaped opening under the middle of the tailgate. Pass the T-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch, located directly above the spare tire. LCE0111 Crew Cab models For Crew Cab models: The tools and tool case are located behind the rear bench seat. 1. Fold the rear bench seat down. Refer to “Folding the rear bench seatdown” in the “Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section earlier in this manual. 1 and jacking tools 䊊 2 . 2. Remove the jack 䊊 1. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle. 6-6 In case of emergency WCE0070 All models: NOTE: 3. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into the T-shaped opening of the spare tire winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tire. Inspect the spacer every six years and replace as necessary. Contact your NISSAN dealer for replacement parts if necessary. CAUTION ● Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire. 4. Once the spare tire is completely lowered, reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer chain, and carefully slide the tire from under the rear of the vehicle. ● Failure to use the spacer may allow the chain to get stuck on the wheel nut holes. LCE2022 5. To reinstall the wheel, insert the tire chain through the wheel. Be sure the rubber spacer is centered on the wheel before lifting. Use the assembled jack rod and slowly rotate the winch clockwise to raise the wheel to the vehicle. CAUTION Be sure to center the spare tire suspending plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire. In case of emergency 6-7 Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire WARNING ● Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. ● Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. ● Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. ● Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. ● Never use blocks on or under the jack. ● Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. ● Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. 6-8 In case of emergency ● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move. Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type. Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions. 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The jack-up points are indicated by stamped arrows on the side of the frame. WCE0152 LCE0087 The jack should be used on firm and level ground. 3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown. 4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. 5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire. In case of emergency 6-9 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated. Lower the vehicle completely. WARNING ● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. WCE0063 Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight. 6-10 In case of emergency ● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. ● Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 98 ft-lb (133 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver’s door opening. 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle. WARNING ● Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. ● The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed. WARNING ● If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. ● Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. ● Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. ● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury. ● Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it. ● Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. ● Keep battery out of the reach of children. ● The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. In case of emergency 6-11 CAUTION ● Always connect positive (⫹) to positive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. ● Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. WCE0066 WARNING Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.). 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence ilA,䊊 B,䊊 C,䊊 D ). lustrated (䊊 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started. CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. 7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable. 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. 6-12 In case of emergency PUSH STARTING CAUTION ● Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged. ● Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage. ● For manual transmission models, never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS WARNING ● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. ● To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. ● Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps. 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission). Do not stop the engine. 2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped). Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen. 4. Open the engine hood. WARNING If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned. 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine. WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time. In case of emergency 6-13 TOWING YOUR VEHICLE 6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer. When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions: WARNING ● Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. ● Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck. CAUTION ● When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used. ● Always attach safety chains before towing. 6-14 In case of emergency For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN Two-wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated. CAUTION ● Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels. WCE0197 A Automatic Transmissions (A/T) 䊊 B Manual Transmissions (M/T) 䊊 ● When towing automatic or manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: – Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism). ● If you have to tow manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies) or four wheels on the ground: ● Always release the parking brake. ● Move the transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) position ● Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for manual transmission models only: Speed: Below 60 MPH (97 km/h) Distance: (805 km) Less than 500 miles If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission. In case of emergency 6-15 LCE0103 WCE0161 Four-wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated. CAUTION Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission. Hooks (if so equipped) VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle) Pulling a stuck vehicle WARNING To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle: ● Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure. 6-16 In case of emergency ● Attach recovery devices only to main structural members of the vehicle or the recovery hooks. Rocking a stuck vehicle ● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle. ● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. ● Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. ● Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle. ● Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device. Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or vehicle recovery. WARNING ● Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. ● Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D (automatic transmission models) or 1st and R (manual transmission models). ● Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55 km/h). 5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle. If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires. 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. ● Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and D (drive) (automatic transmission models) or 1st (low) and R (reverse) (manual transmission models). ● Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion. In case of emergency 6-17 MEMO 6-18 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can: ● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain. ● after driving on coastal roads. ● when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. ● when dust or mud builds up on the surface. Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. 7-2 Appearance and care CAUTION ● Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used. ● Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. ● Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots. WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. ● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. ● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. REMOVING SPOTS CAUTION Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements. UNDERBODY ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped) In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels. CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels: ● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels. ● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature. ● Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied. CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish. TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions: ● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing. ● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove). ● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves. ● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer. Appearance and care 7-3 CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens. WARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury. CAUTION ● Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material. ● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s natural finish. Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners. ● Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer. ● NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position. ● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover. AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions: ● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface. 7-4 Appearance and care ● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces. FLOOR MATS WARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury: ● Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your vehicle model. See your NISSAN dealer for more information. ● Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning aid. See ⴖFloor mat positioning aidⴖ in this section. The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn. CORROSION PROTECTION SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. WARNING LAI0009 Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes two driver’s side front floor mat brackets and one passenger’s side front floor mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place. Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has two grommet holes incorporated in it and the passenger’s side has one grommet hole. Position each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet holes while centering the mat in the floorwell. Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned. Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing. MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION ● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. ● Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion. Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used. Appearance and care 7-5 Temperature CAUTION Air pollution ● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces. ● Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated. TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION ● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. ● Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. ● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. ● Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible. 7-6 Appearance and care Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer. 8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 5-speed automatic transmission fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Clutch fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with long service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance. It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain. Scheduled maintenance For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. 8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself GENERAL MAINTENANCE Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer. Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and economical way. During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” later in this section. EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with “ * ” is found later in this section. Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km). Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Additional information on the following items with an “*” is found later in this section. Automatic transmission P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes. Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Parking brake Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, see a NISSAN dealer. Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3 Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. 8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately. Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections. Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See the “Appearance and care” section of this manual. Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed. WARNING ● Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park). ● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs. ● If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. ● It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. ● Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. ● Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. ● If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. ● Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. ● Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery. ● On gasoline engine models, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off. CAUTION ● Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. ● Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. ● Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position. ● Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position. This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS QR25DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir Fuse/Fusible link box Fuse and relay box Air cleaner Engine oil filler cap Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) 8. Drive belt location 9. Radiator cap 10. Power steering fluid reservoir 11. Battery 12. Engine coolant reservoir WDI0643 8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself VQ40DE engine 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir Fuse/fusible link box Fuse and relay box Engine oil filler cap Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) 7. Air cleaner 8. Drive belt location 9. Radiator cap 10. Power steering fluid reservoir 11. Battery 12. Engine coolant reservoir LII0167 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary. WARNING ● Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “If your vehicle overheats” found in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. ● The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap. 8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself CAUTION ● Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system. ● When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system. ● The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for more details. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating. WARNING ● To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. LDI0436 VQ40DE CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level. LDI0466 QR25DE This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for more details. The engine coolant reservoir is a pressurized tank. When installing the cap, tighten. If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer. ● Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. ● Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. ● Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets. Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9 ENGINE OIL WDI0672 VQ40DE CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way. 8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself LDI0467 QR25DE LDI0371 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and B . This is the normal operL (Low) marks 䊊 ating oil level range. If the oil level is below A , remove the oil filler cap the L (Low) mark 䊊 and pour recommended oil through the C. opening. Do not overfill 䊊 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty. WDI0500 VQ40DE CHANGING ENGINE OIL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off. A by turning it 3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊 counterclockwise. WDI0501 QR25DE If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See “Changing engine oil filter” in this section. ● Waste oil must be disposed of properly. ● Check your local regulations. 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug. B with a wrench by 5. Remove the drain plug 䊊 turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11 WARNING ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. ● Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. ● Keep used engine oil out of reach of children. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine. 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required. 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. 6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m) 7. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual for drain and refill capacity. 8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself WDI0502 VQ40DE CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off. 3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter. 4. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter exposing the filter. (For VQ40DE engine only) A with an oil filter 5. Loosen the oil filter 䊊 wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. 5-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (if so equipped) 7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil. 8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. 9. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required. 10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary. WDI0503 QR25DE CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. When checking or replacement is required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing. CAUTION ● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. ● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment. 6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag. CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine damage. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13 POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. WARNING ● Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch (if so equipped) systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake and clutch system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. WDI0256 The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° 80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C). If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through the opening. CAUTION ● DO NOT OVERFILL. ● Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Genuine 8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ● Clean the filler cap before removing. ● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children. CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water. LDI0463 BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer. WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent. CAUTION ● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for windshield-washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint. LDI0463 CLUTCH FLUID (if so equipped) Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir (manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer. For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. LDI0441 WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) comes on. To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshieldwasher fluid into the reservoir opening. ● Do not fill the windshield-washer reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer reservoir. ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water. Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15 BATTERY ● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water. ● Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. ● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge. NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. WARNING ● Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. ● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. ● When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. ● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. 8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ● Keep battery out of the reach of children. ● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer. WDI0224 1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case. WDI0529 2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent caps. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17 VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVE BELT A is located near the battery The current sensor 䊊 along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area. WDI0639 LDI0454 CAUTION ● Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. ● Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator. 8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself VQ40DE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Power steering fluid pump Automatic belt tensioner Cooling fan Air conditioner compressor Crankshaft pulley Generator WARNING Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. SPARK PLUGS 1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer. 2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. LDI0461 QR25DE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Power steering fluid pump Water pump Air conditioner compressor (if so equipped) Crankshaft pulley Generator SDI1895 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum-tipped spark plugs (QR25DE models) A It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped 䊊 spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. ● Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19 AIR CLEANER If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for assistance. Iridium-tipped spark plugs (VQ40DE models) A It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊 spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. ● Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones. If replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for assistance. WDI0686 VQ40DE The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth. To remove the VQ40DE air cleaner filter: 1 䊊 Push down on the clips and remove the air cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner filter. To remove the QR25DE air cleaner filter: A,䊊 B,䊊 C. 1. Unlatch the clips 䊊 8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself LDI0465 QR25DE 2. Push down half of air cleaner to clear the bottom retainers. 3. Lift up on half of air cleaner to remove the air cleaner filter WARNING ● Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury. IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so equipped) The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for change intervals. To replace the filter, perform the following procedure: LDI0442 1. Open the glove box and press in on the sides so that it will open completely allowing it to hang by the cord. LDI2047 1 . 2. Gently lift up on the tab 䊊 3. Pull the filter cover toward you and then 2 . down 䊊 3 . 4. Remove the old filters 䊊 NOTE: The filters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should face downward. 5. Insert the first new filter into the housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new filter into the housing. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES 6. Replace the filter cover. The cover will click into place under the tab. 7. Install the glove box door. CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision. WDI0408 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. 䊊 2 3 䊊 Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove. Remove the wiper blade. 4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place. 5. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove. 8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. 6. Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield. Self-adjusting brakes CAUTION Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. ● After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. ● Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure. WARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. Brake pad wear indicators LDI2142 If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle A . This may cause clogging or improper wind䊊 shield washer operation. If wax gets into the B. nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin 䊊 The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23 FUSES Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. LDI0455 A is used in Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊 the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is used in the passenger compartment fuse 䊊 box. Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box. Type A fuses can be installed in the engine compartment and passenger compartment fuse boxes. 8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself LDI0457 If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely. Type B fuses cannot be installed in the underhood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes. 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment. LDI0444 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. WDI0452 A , replace it with a new 5. If the fuse is open 䊊 B. fuse 䊊 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer. If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25 If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF. 2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. WDI0452 LDI0445 Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts. PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. 8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Type A A , replace it with an 4. If the fuse is open 䊊 B. equivalent good fuse 䊊 5. Push the fuse box cover to install. 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer. How to replace the extended storage switch: 1. To remove the extended storage switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position. 2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position. 3. Remove the fuse box cover. 1 found on each 4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊 side of the storage switch. 5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the 2 . fuse box 䊊 LDI0456 Type B LDI2035 Extended storage switch If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse. NOTE: The extended storage switch is used for long term vehicle storage. Even if the extended storage switch is broken it is not necessary to replace it. Replace only the open fuse in the switch with a new fuse. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27 BATTERY REPLACEMENT CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts. LDI2026 KEYFOB (if so equipped) Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows: 1 䊊 2 䊊 8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself A. Open the lid using a coin 䊊 B. Remove the battery 䊊 3 䊊 C with the “+” facing Install a new battery 䊊 down. ● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity. LIGHTS ● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as it could cause a malfunction. ● When changing the battery, do not let dust or oil get on the keyfob. ● There is danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent. 4 䊊 Close the lid securely. button, then the 5. Press the button two or three times to check the keyfob operation. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5. ● An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. ● The keyfob is water-resistant; however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. ● The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions. FCC Notice: HEADLIGHTS For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly. For Canada: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. ● When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope. CAUTION ● High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. ● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE HANDS. ● Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart. ● Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of the headlight. ● Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29 Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer. 4. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclockwise until it is free from the headlight reflecA. tor and then remove it 䊊 5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it B. 䊊 Replacing the headlight bulb 1. Insert the bulb. DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE HANDS. 2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer. ● Be sure the lip of the bulb socket contacts the headlight body. 3. Push the electrical connector into the bulb plastic base until it snaps and stops. 4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable. 5. Close the hood. LDI0446 Removing the headlight bulb 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. 8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Item Wattage (W) Headlight 60/55 Turn signal light/Parking light 28/8 Side marker 5 Rear combination light Turn signal 27 Stop/Tail 27/8 Back-up 18 License plate light 5 Fog light*2 (if so equipped) 55 Map lights (if so equipped) 8 Interior light 8 High-mounted stop light/cargo light*2 12.8 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. * The bulb is not serviceable in-vehicle. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance. Bulb No.*1 9007 (HB5) HT7444NA 168 3156AK 3157K 921 W5W H11 AL12 AL25 912LF LDI0713 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Map lights (if so equipped) Interior light High-mounted stop light/cargo light License plate light Rear combination light Fog light (if so equipped) Headlight assembly Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31 LDI0478 Map lights/personal lights WDI0306 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover. : Indicates bulb removal : Indicates bulb installation 8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself WDI0206 Interior light 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth 䊊 WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) WDI0300 Rear combination light WDI0411 License plate light This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning message is displayed in the odometer, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33 Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because: ● Most tires naturally lose air over time. ● Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking. The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. 8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. WARNING ● Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. ● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. ● Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. 5 䊊 6 䊊 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” later in this section. Spare tire size. LDI2007 Tire and loading information label 1 䊊 2 䊊 3 䊊 Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle. Vehicle load limit: See loading information in the “Technical and consumer information” section. Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory. 4 䊊 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35 3. Remove the gauge. 4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tire and Loading Information label. LDI0393 Checking tire pressure 1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire. 2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage. 8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed. 6. Install the valve stem cap. 7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare. Size Front Original Tire: P235/75R15 P265/70R16 P265/75R16 P265/60R18 Rear Original Tire: P235/75R15 P265/70R16 P265/75R16 P265/60R18 Spare Tire: P235/75R15 P265/70R16 P265/75R16 P265/60R18 Cold Tire Inflation Pressure 240 kPa, 35 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSI WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall. WDI0395 Example 1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 䊊 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information). 2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. 3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. 5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law. 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37 3 Tire ply composition and material 䊊 The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. 4 Maximum permissible inflation pres䊊 sure WDI0396 Example 2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a 䊊 new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. 2. Two-digit code: identification mark. Manufacturer’s 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. 8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional). 5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture. 6. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire. This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. 5 Maximum load rating 䊊 This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire. 6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” 䊊 Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”). 7 The word “radial” 䊊 The word “radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure. 8 Manufacturer or brand name 䊊 Manufacturer or brand name is shown. Other Tire-related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. TYPES OF TIRES WARNING ● When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. ● Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas. Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Snow tires If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39 studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. TIRE CHAINS Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. 8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress. Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear paved roads. WDI0258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section in this manual for tire replacing procedures. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: ● The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. 98 ft-lb (133 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval. ● Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury. WARNING ● After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure. ● Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). ● Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. WDI0259 1. 2. Wear indicator Location mark Tire wear and damage WARNING ● Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced. ● Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41 Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. WARNING ● The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, VDC system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. ● If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury. 8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself ● If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions. ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. ● Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. ● Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. ● The use of retread recommended. tires is not ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Four-wheel drive models CAUTION Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears. If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer. Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage. ● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Care of wheels ● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. ● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. ● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. ● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. ● NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) Your vehicle may be equipped with a full size spare that is a different size or brand than the tires originally installed on the vehicle. This full size spare tire is intended for temporary use only and should be replaced at the first opportunity. Observe the following precautions if the full size temporary use only spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident: WARNING ● The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage. ● Drive carefully while the spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. The vehicle driving performance may be affected when driving on wet or snow covered roads. ● When the temporary full size spare is installed, the following systems may not work correctly: – Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). – Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System. ● Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the spare tire inflated to the pressure specification shown on the tire and loading information label. ● With the spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h). ● When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the temporary spare tire should be used on the front wheels and the original tire used on the rear wheels. Use tire chains only on the drive wheels. ● Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles. ● Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time. CAUTION ● Do not use tire chains on a spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43 MEMO 8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Air conditioner system (if so equipped) refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Air conditioner specification label (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Installing front license plate with grommets . . . . . . . 9-12 Installing front license plate without grommets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Utili-track™ channel system (if so equipped) . . . . . . 9-17 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Crew Cab Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 King Cab models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Special Body vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-38 Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-39 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity. Capacity (Approximate) Imp measure Liter 21-1/8gal 17-5/8 gal 80 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section. 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt 5.1 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8 For QR25DE ● Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent ● Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1 ● Viscosity SAE 5W-30*11 For VQ40DE ● Genuine NISSAN engine oil or equivalent ● Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1 ● Viscosity SAE 5W-30*10 QR25DE 2-1/2 gal 2-1/8 gal 9.4 VQ40DE 2-3/4 gal 2-1/4 gal 10.2 5M/T 3-1/8 qt 2-1/2 qt 2.9 6 M/T 4X2 6 M/T 4X4 4-1/4 qt 4-1/2 qt 3-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.0 4.2 Fuel Engine oil *7 Drain and Refill With oil filter change Without oil filter change QR25DE With oil filter change Without oil filter change Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure VQ40DE Cooling system With reservoir Manual transmission gear oil Automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid (PSF) 9-2 Technical and consumer information Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 Refill to the proper level according to the instrucGenuine NISSAN Matic S ATF *2 tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*3 Brake and clutch fluid Multi-purpose grease Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent DOT 3 — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *5 Air conditioning system oil — — — Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or equivalent *5 Transfer fluid 2-1/8 qt 1-3/4 qt 2.0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended *6 Front final drive oil 1-3/4 pt 1-1/2 pt 0.85 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90 *8 Rear final drive oil (except 6 speed M/T and O/R vehicles) Rear final drive oil (6 speed M/T and O/R vehicles only) 3-3/8 pt 4-1/4 pt 2-7/8 pt 3-1/2 pt 1.6 2.0 API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 *9 Genuine NISSAN differential oil synthetic 75W-140 or API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-140 *9 Windshield-washer fluid 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent *1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section. *2: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. *3: DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used. *4: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer. *5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label” in this section. *6: Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. *7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. *8: For hot climates, Viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0° (32°F) *9: See a NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil. *10: NISSAN recommends the use of Genuine NISSAN Ester Oil, available at a NISSAN dealer. *11: As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE 5W-30 or SAE 10W-30 conventional petroleum based oils may be used and meet all specifications and requirements necessary to maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Technical and consumer information 9-3 FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). CAUTION ● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85. ● Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. ● Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. ● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. 9-4 Technical and consumer information ● U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications. Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available. Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com- patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. ● The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. ● If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) ● E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. ● If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles. If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage. E–15 fuel E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. E–85 fuel E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine. detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load. Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you Technical and consumer information 9-5 Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage. Selecting the correct oil filter LTI2061 ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy. Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval 9-6 Technical and consumer information Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used. Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in “Change intervals.” Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes: ● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures ● driving in dusty conditions ● extensive idling ● towing a trailer ● stop and go commuting Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for the maintenance schedule. CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system. AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM (if so equipped) REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN A/C system oil Type R or the exact equivalents. Technical and consumer information 9-7 SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order QR25DE Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 4-cylinder in-line in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0) cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488) 1–3–4–2 Idle speed M/T A/T (in “N” position) Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Spark plug Spark plug gap (Nominal) Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92) 241.30 (3,954) 1–2–3–4–5–6 See the “Emission control information label” on the underside of the hood. Standard PLZKAR6A-11 in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) Camshaft operation This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002. 9-8 Technical and consumer information VQ40DE Timing chain DILFR5A-11 0.043 (1.1) Timing chain WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Wheels Steel 15 x 6.5JJ Steel 16 x 7.0JJ Alloy 16 x 7.0JJ Alloy (off-road) 16 x7.0JJ Alloy 18 x 7.5JJ Tires P235/75R15 P265/70R16 P265/75R16 P265/60R18 Spare tire Full size Overall length Short wheel base Long wheel base Overall width Overall height With roof rack Without roof rack S and SV I-4 King cab models (4x2) SV (4x2 and 4x4) and Pro-4X (4x4) King cab models Crew cab models Front Track Rear Track Wheelbase Short wheel base Long wheel base Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) 205.5 (5,220) 219.4 (5,574) 72.8 (1,850) in (mm) 73.9 (1,878) in (mm) 68.7 (1,745) in (mm) 69.7 (1,770) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) 70.1 (1,780) 61.8 (1,570) 61.8 (1,570) in (mm) in (mm) 125.9 (3,200) 139.9 (3,554) lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V. S.S. certification label” on the lb (kg) center pillar between the driver’s side front and rear lb (kg) doors. Technical and consumer information 9-9 WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result. 9-10 Technical and consumer information LTI0130 LTI0085 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration. QR25DE engine LTI0127 VQ40DE engine ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown. LTI0136 LTI0133 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully. The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown. Technical and consumer information 9-11 INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE LTI0135 LTI0206 LTI0137 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL (if so equipped) INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE WITH GROMMETS The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown. The air conditioner specification label is affixed as shown. Use the following steps to mount the front license plate with grommets: 1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the location mark (small dimple) using a 0.37 in (9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill. Insert two plastic grommets provided. Install the license plate holder using the two bolts (and washers) provided. 2. Mount the license plate using two M614 mm bolts. License plate bolt tightening torque: 3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m) 9-12 Technical and consumer information VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE WITHOUT GROMMETS Use the following steps to mount the front license plate without grommets: 1. Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher at the location mark (small dimple) using a 0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the threads behind the finisher, apply only light pressure to the drill. 2. Mount the license plate bracket using two 8 mm slotted hex head screws. WARNING ● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. ● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: ● Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo. ● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. ● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer. Technical and consumer information 9-13 ● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label. ● Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit. VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. See “Measurement of weights” later in this section. 9-14 Technical and consumer information Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label. To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration. Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.) LTI0152 Example Technical and consumer information 9-15 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. WARNING ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. LTI0102 Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See “Measurement of weights” later in this section. Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label. 9-16 Technical and consumer information SECURING THE LOAD For your convenience, tie down hooks (if so equipped) are placed at each corner of the truck box. These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box. ● Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. UTILI-TRACK™ CHANNEL SYSTEM (if so equipped) WARNING LTI0107 1. 2. 3. 4. Side channels Header channel Channel sections Floor channels ● Properly install and tighten the tiedown cleats into the Utili-track™ channel system. Also, do not attach any rope or straps directly to the channel. Failure to properly install the tie-down cleats or attaching ropes or straps directly to the channel can cause the cargo to become unsecured. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. The tie-down cleats must be installed so the clamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seated in the notches, it will not be flush with the rail and cannot be properly tightened. The bolt in the center of the cleat must be tightened hand tight (20 – 40 inlbs) Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat periodically during a trip to make sure the center bolt has not become loose. Install the tie-down cleat as follows: 1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding them out the back of the truck bed. Properly store the channel protectors. 2. Loosen the center bolt completely. The Utili-track™ channel system allows you to move tie-down clamps in the bed to the best location to secure a load. Technical and consumer information 9-17 LTI0103 3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpendicular to the channel as shown. Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° and slide it to the desired location. LTI0104 4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottom fully seat into the channel detents. 9-18 Technical and consumer information WTI0124 5. There should be no gap between the bottom of the cleat and the top of the channel. Tighten the center bolt hand tight (20-40 inlbs ). Technical and consumer information 9-19 LTI0106 CAUTION ● Install only one cleat per section of channel. ● Applying loads at angles to the cleats greater then 45° or loads greater than 150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or 200 lbs. (side channels) may cause damage to the channel or bed. 9-20 Technical and consumer information LTI0123 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation WARNING Do not install accessories over the gap between the front and rear side channels. Doing this could affect the rear structure in certain rear impacts, which could result in serious injury. WTI0119 CAUTION Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to prevent it from sliding or shifting. Use the channel end stoppers to help secure items in the channels from sliding off the end of the truck bed. Channel end stoppers (if so equipped) The channel end stoppers should be used to help prevent accessories installed in the channels from sliding or shifting off the end of the truck bed. They must be installed so they are properly seated in the detents in the channel. Technical and consumer information 9-21 TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING INFORMATION Install the channels end stoppers as follows: 1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding them out the back of the truck bed. Properly store the channel protectors. 2. Loosen the bolt on the center of the end stopper with the provided wrench and insert it into the channel. 3. Position the end stopper to the desired location on the channel so the nubs on the bottom of the end stopper fully seat into the channel detents. 4. Tighten the bolt on the center of the end stopper with the provided wrench. LOADING TIPS ● The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ● Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR. 9-22 Technical and consumer information WARNING ● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. ● Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. ● Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty. CREW CAB MODELS Crew Cab short wheel base models should not be used to carry a slide-in camper. KING CAB MODELS This information is provided for you to properly install a slide-in camper and is based on the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations. It is recommended that, before installing the camper, you carefully read the following information and ensure that the camper meets the specifications. This information may not apply to some Canada model vehicles. SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES Some vehicles are equipped with commercial or camper bodies. However, this Owner’s Manual does not cover these options. For further information, please refer to the body manufacturer’s instruction manual. WARNING Overloading or improper loading can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents. VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY LTI0128 LOCATION FOR CENTER OF GRAVITY The illustration indicates the recommended cargo center of gravity location. King Cab: L1 = 41.5 in (1,054 mm) WARNING Improper loading may be dangerous. If a load is too far back, it can affect handling characteristics. If a load is too far forward, the front axle may be overloaded. LTI0129 When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the camper manufacturer’s weight figure, plus: ● the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the camper manufacturer’s weight figure, ● the weight of camper cargo, The vehicle payload weight capacity shown on the Tire and Loading Information label, see “Tire and Loading Information label” in this section, indicates the maximum total weight of passengers, optional equipment (air conditioning, trailer hitch, etc) and cargo that your vehicle is designed to carry. Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See ’’Vehicle Loading Information’’ earlier in this section for details. Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label. ● and the weight of occupants in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s pay load weight rating and the camper’s center of gravity should fall within the truck’s recommended center of gravity location when installed. Technical and consumer information 9-23 TOWING A TRAILER MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings. WARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents. CAUTION ● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. ● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems. A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for proper towing. 9-24 Technical and consumer information MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the “Towing Load/Specification” chart found later in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. ● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value specified in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. Temperature conditions can also affect towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions. WARNING LTI0161 The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps). Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. CAUTION WTI0160 Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load. Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. Technical and consumer information 9-25 Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load. The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity. CA0036 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW) The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. 9-26 Technical and consumer information All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards. To determine the available payload capacity for tongue load, use the following procedure. 1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. 2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer. 3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue load. To determine the available towing capacity, use the following procedure. 1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the ⬙Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart found later in this section. 2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity. To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity. Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings. Example: ● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale- including passengers, cargo and hitch - 5,185 lb. (2352 kg). ● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label 5,815 lb. (2638 kg). ● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from “Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart 11,133 lb. (5050 kg). The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle. ● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart - 6,100 lb. (2767 kg). Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight. 5,815 lb. (2638 kg) – 5,185 lb. (2352 kg) = 630 lb. (286 kg) GVWR GVW Available for tongue weight 11,133 lb. (5050 kg) GCWR – 5,185 lb. (2352 kg) GVW = 5,948 lb. (2698 kg) Capacity available for towing 630 lb. (286 kg) Available tongue weight / 5,948 lb. (2698 kg) = Available capacity 10 % tongue weight The trailer frontal area affects the towing load of a trailer. The frontal area is the total area of the vehicle and trailer that is affected by air resistance while towing. Do not exceed the maximum trailer frontal area specification shown in the ⬙Towing Load/Specification” chart. The frontal area can be determined by multiplying the width of the trailer by the height of the trailer. For example, a trailer that is 8 feet wide by 6 feet tall has a trailer frontal area of 48 square feet. Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings. Trailer frontal area CAUTION Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal area specification may exceed the towing capacity of the vehicle. This may affect the towing performance and lead to vehicle damage. Technical and consumer information 9-27 TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION Maximum Towing Capacity*1, *2, *3 Maximum Tongue Load*2, *3 Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating Maximum trailer frontal area King Cab 2WD (4 cyl) King Cab 2WD (6 cyl) King Cab 4WD (6 cyl) Crew Cab 2WD Crew Cab 4WD 3,500 lb. (1,588 kg) 6,500 lb. (2,949 kg) 6,300 lb. (2,858 kg) 6,300 lb. (2,858 kg) 6,100 lb. (2,767 kg) 350 lb. (158 kg) 650 lb. (295 kg) 630 lb. (285 kg) 630 lb. (285 kg) 610 lb. (276 kg) 7,936 lb. (3,600 kg) 11,230 lb. (5,094 kg) 11,230 lb. (5,094 kg) 11,230 lb. (5,094 kg) 11,230 lb. (5,094 kg) 30sq feet (2.78 sq meters) *1: ● The towing capacity is calculated using the SAE International SAE J2807 test method. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity. ● All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. ● NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lb (1,361 kg). *2: The maximum towing capacity when using the genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 3,500 lb. (1,588 kg) and 350 lb. (158 kg) tongue load. *3: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. 9-28 Technical and consumer information TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from your NISSAN dealer. If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks. WARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage. Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer: ● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut. Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground. ● The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball. ● Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight. ● The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole in the ball mount. Technical and consumer information 9-29 Weight distribution hitch This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle. LTI0132 Bumper towing The genuine NISSAN step bumper has provisions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designed to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,588 kg). To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle in the A , then remove it to center of the step bumper 䊊 install the trailer hitch ball. Weight carrying hitches A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver. 9-30 Technical and consumer information A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) . Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system. NOTE: A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If you are considering use of a weightdistributing hitch system with a surge brake-equipped trailer, check with the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weightdistributing hitch system. General set-up instructions are as follows: 1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level. 2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle. 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2. WARNING Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage. Sway control device Class IV hitch Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device. Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,535 kg). A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,268 kg). Class I hitch Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg). Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the “Towing Load/Specification” chart earlier in this section. CAUTION Class III hitch ● Special hitches which include frame reinforcements are required for towing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genuine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport utility vehicles are available at a NISSAN dealer. ● The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper. ● Do not use axle-mounted hitches. Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg). ● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch. Class II hitch Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg). The genuine NISSAN step bumper is considered a Class II ball mount. ● To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the receiver when not in use. ● Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted. Tire pressures ● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. ● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer’s specifications. Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners. Technical and consumer information 9-31 Trailer lights Trailer brakes CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed. Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. A flat 4–pin harness is available from your dealer for vehicles without a tow package. If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are available at auto parts stores and hitch retailers. 9-32 Technical and consumer information If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed. Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer harness connector are pre-wired for a trailer brake controller. See a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brake adapter harness. WARNING Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system. When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. However, most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow. Several types of braking systems are available. Surge Brakes -The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer. Electric Trailer Brakes -Electric braking systems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special brakesensing module). If electric trailer brakes are used, see ⬙Electric trailer brake controller⬙ in this section. Have a professional supplier of towing equipment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing. Electric trailer brake controller Trailers equipped with electric brakes may require the installation of an aftermarket trailer brake controller. A Genuine NISSAN jumper harness is available that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake controller. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Pre-towing tips ● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition. ● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. ● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low. ● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side. ● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle. ● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle. ● Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known. Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions. ● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. ● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched. ● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. ● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. ● Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. ● When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so: CAUTION If you move the shift lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur. 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels. 3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park). indicator light (if so 6. Make sure the equipped) indicates the transfer case is in 4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. If indicator light is flashing, or the ATP the light is ON, make sure the transmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. See “Automatic transmission park warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section and “Using four wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section. 7. Turn off the engine. Technical and consumer information 9-33 To drive away: 1. Start the vehicle. 2. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 3. Shift the transmission into gear. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks. 6. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks. ● While going downhill, the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides “engine braking” and reduces the need to brake as frequently. ● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first 500 miles (805 km). ● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h). ● Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. ● When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn. ● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. Do the following if the trailer begins to sway: ● If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this owner’s manual. 1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle ● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. – Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes. 9-34 Technical and consumer information 2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area. 3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described earlier in this section. ● Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. ● Downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes. ● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. ● Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. ● NISSAN recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer. ● Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits. ● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break. ● When launching a boat, don’t allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper. ● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out. When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section earlier in this manual. FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home. CAUTION ● Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. ● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward. ● DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. ● For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. ● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts. Automatic Transmission (if so equipped) To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product. Manual Transmission (if so equipped) ● Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. ● On 4-wheel drive vehicles, place the transfer case in the 2H range. Failure to do so will cause the powertrain to bind up. Technical and consumer information 9-35 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B and C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 9-36 Technical and consumer information WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A, B and C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties: For USA For USA 1. Emission Defects Warranty 2. Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: ● Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: ● Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN. If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-SecSur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx. Technical and consumer information 9-37 READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada’s Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers). To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122. WARNING A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. 9-38 Technical and consumer information If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing. EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ● How various systems in your vehicle were operating; ● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; ● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ● How fast the vehicle was traveling. ● Sounds are not recorded. OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law. Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factorytrained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be purchased. For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: 1-800-450-9491 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact: 1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you. Technical and consumer information 9-39 MEMO 9-40 Technical and consumer information 10 Index 4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 A Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . .5-36 Active Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65 Air bag system Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-72 Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-79 Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-80, 2-19 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-19 Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16, 4-24 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-24 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64 Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-15 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-35 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59 Compact disc (CD) player . .4-37, 4-42, 4-48 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40, 4-45 Audio System iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54, 4-56 Audio system Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-63 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50, 4-52 Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Automatic Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-49 Automatic transmission position indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-13 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-15 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 AUX jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38, 4-43, 4-50 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66, 4-80 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60 Brake Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-35 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-31 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-23, 8-23 Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 Brightness control Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-15 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31 C B Battery . . . . . . . . . . . Charge warning light . Before starting the engine Belt (See drive belt) . . . Block heater Engine . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 .2-16 .5-12 .8-18 . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 . . . . . . . . . . .4-59 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Cargo light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62 CD player (See audio system) . .4-37, 4-42, 4-48 Check tire press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Child restraints . . . . . . .1-23, 1-24, 1-25, 1-27 Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-37, 1-50, 1-60 Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-30 Child restraint with top tether strap. . . . . . .1-30 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36 (models without navigation system) . . . .4-36 Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36 Clutch Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . . . . .2-36 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-11 Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Compact disc (CD) player . . . .4-37, 4-42, 4-48 Compass display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . .4-9 Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4 Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Controls Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-63 Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16, 4-24 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-9 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-77 10-2 D Daytime running light system (Canada only) . Defroster switch Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . Display controls (see control panel buttons) Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . Driving with automatic transmission . . . Driving with manual transmission . . . . . Precautions when starting and driving . . .2-30 .2-27 . .9-9 .2-31 . .4-4 . .3-3 .2-16 .8-18 .5-41 .5-13 .5-18 . .5-2 E Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emission control information label . . . . . Emission control system warranty . . . . . Engine Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . Engine compartment check locations . . Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 .8-10 . .8-6 . .2-6 . .8-8 .8-10 . .9-6 .2-17 . .9-6 .9-11 . .9-8 .5-12 . .2-8 . .4-4 .9-39 . .5-2 .8-27 F . .5-24 . .5-31 . .2-35 . .9-11 . .9-37 . .5-12 . .5-42 . . . . . .9-2 . .8-9 .8-11 .8-12 First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-3 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Fluid Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-15 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-11 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-72 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-11 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . .2-5, 3-11 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 G Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 .3-11 . .2-6 . .2-8 . .2-7 . .2-4 . .2-4 . .2-6 . .2-9 . .2-4 . .2-8 . .8-2 .2-42 H Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66, 4-80 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-28 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Head restraints Active Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Heater Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16, 4-24 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-17, 4-25 Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-54 Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 I Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-2, 5-12 Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-11 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Indicator lights and audible reminders (See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-15 Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-31 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-31 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54, 4-56 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27 J Jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 K Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-28 Keyless entry system (See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . .3-6 L Labels Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-11 Emission control information label . . . . .9-11 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-11 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-12 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-10 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-79 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27 10-3 License plate Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Light Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-80, 2-19 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-31 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-15 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-17 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-74 Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Lights Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Lock Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 3-11 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-17 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-19 Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13 M Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Maintenance precautions . . . . . Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . Under the hood and vehicle . . . Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . Instrument brightness control . . . Mirror Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-remote control system (See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 . .8-3 . .8-5 . .8-2 .1-23 . .8-4 .2-21 . .1-2 .2-49 .2-53 .2-43 . .2-3 .2-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 .3-15 .3-16 .3-14 .2-50 . . . . . .3-6 N NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-2, 5-12 NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . . .4-86 O Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-5 10-4 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overheat If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . Owner’s manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 . .9-2 .8-11 .8-12 .8-10 .8-10 . .9-6 . .9-6 .3-16 .5-17 .6-13 .9-39 .9-39 P Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66, 4-80 Power Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Precautions Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . .1-25, 1-37, 1-50, 1-60 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65 Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2 Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . . . .1-78 Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 R Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-65 FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40, 4-45 Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-63 Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . . .2-37 RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10 Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . . . .2-27 Recorders Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-10 Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-37 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 S Safety Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Child seat belts . . . . .1-25, 1-37, 1-50, 1-60 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-37 Seat Jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Seat belt Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-15 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . .1-78 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22 Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-22 Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-18 Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Seats Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-2 Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-2, 5-12 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27 Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 Shifting Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-22 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-77 Sonar Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-79 Starting Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-12 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Steering Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-63 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38, 2-40 Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-79 10-5 Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-80, 2-19 Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-72 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-79 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-65 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-65 Switch Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-49 Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . . .2-36 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-3 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-28 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-28 Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-34 Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . .2-37 Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-27 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26 T Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Tailgate latch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17, 3-21, 3-22 10-6 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6 Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-2, 5-12 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13 Tire Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-43 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-12 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40 Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40 Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-36 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-17 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-30 Towing 2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Transceiver HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-54 Transmission Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-13 Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-18 Travel (See registering your vehicle in another country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 U Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 USB interface Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-51, 4-53 V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-18 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-9 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-34 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-37 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . .9-10 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . .2-25, 3-2, 5-12 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 W Warning 4WD warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-80, 2-19 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-15 Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-16 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-17 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-3 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-17 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-74 Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-79 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-26 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Windows Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-49 Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . Windshield wiper and washer switch . . Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 . . .2-26 . . .2-26 . . .8-22 10-7 GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL INFORMATION: Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). CAUTION ● Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. ● U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. For additional information, see “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section. RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL: ● Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. ● Genuine NISSAN engine oil equivalent ● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. ● Viscosity SAE 5W-30 ● Engine oil with API Certification Mark See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. COLD TIRE PRESSURE: See Tire and Loading Information label. The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 mi (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the “Break-in schedule” information found in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. Printing : September 2013 (18) Publication No.: OM1E OM14E0D40U1 0D40U0 Printed in U.S.A. D40-D